Yamaha Operations Owner`s manual

PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
Operation Guide
E
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all
installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on
different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in
is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer
authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service
Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti
asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä
käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW :
EARTH
BLUE :
NEUTRAL
BROWN :
LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E
or by the safety earth symbol
or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE
MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The above warning is located on the
rear of the unit
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to
the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
NEDERLAND
THE NETHERLANDS
● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen
back-up.
● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory
back-up.
● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde
van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service
Afdeiing:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel. 030-2828425
● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the
disposal at the end of the service life please consult your
retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL
UTRECHT
Tel: 030-2828425
● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small
chemical waste.
Important
Important
Read the following before operating the
AW4416
❒ Warnings
• Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet. Fire or
electrical shock may result.
• Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this
Owner’s Manual or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power
cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on top of the power cord. A
damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be
careful not to place heavy objects on a power cord covered by a carpet.
• If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign
object or liquid gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the
power cord from the AC outlet. Consult your dealer for repair. Using the unit
in this condition is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
• Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged, turn the power
switch off, remove the power plug from the AC outlet, and contact your
dealer. If you continue using the unit without heeding this instruction, fire or
electrical shock may result.
• If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your
dealer for a replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire
and electrical shock hazard.
• Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
❒ Cautions
• When rack-mounting the unit, allow enough free space around the unit for
normal ventilation. This should be: 10 cm at the sides, 20 cm behind, and 30
cm above.
For normal ventilation during use, remove the rear of the rack or open a ventilation hole.
If the airflow is not adequate, the unit will heat up inside and may cause a
fire.
• This unit has ventilation holes at the bottom to prevent the internal temperature rising too high. Do not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a fire
hazard.
• Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Never
pull the cord. A damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock
hazard.
iv
— Operation Guide
Important
• Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard.
• Use only the included power supply cable for this unit. Using other types may
be a fire hazard.
• Always touch a well-grounded metal surface or the like to fully discharge any
static electric charge on your body and clothing before handling an I/O card
or hard disk.
Neglecting this precaution can cause damage to the unit from static electricity.
• Be careful not to touch the leads (metal feet) on the rear side when handling
an I/O card or hard disk. Touching the leads can cause contact defects.
❒ Operating Notes
• Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs,
use the telephone away from the unit.
• XLR-type connectors are wired as follows: pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and
pin 3: cold (–).
• Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows: sleeve: ground, tip: send, and
ring: return.
• If the message “LOW BATTERY” appears when you turn on this unit, contact
your dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup battery. The unit will still operate correctly, but data other than the presets will be
lost.
We recommend that you save the data on CD-RW drive or external SCSI
device before replacing the battery.
• The performance of components with moving contacts, such switches, rotary
controls, faders, and connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of deterioration depends on the operating environment and is unavoidable. Consult your
dealer about replacing defective components.
Handling the CD-R/RW media
Please observe the following points when handling the disk.
Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost, the
drive to malfunction, or the printed label to become blurred.
• Do not place the disk in locations of direct sunlight, high temperature, or high
humidity.
• Do not touch either surface of the disk.
• Hold the disk at the edges. Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording surface of the disk.
• Do not wipe the disk with chemicals or detergents.
• Do not bend or drop the disk.
• Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust. Vigorously rubbing the surface of
the disk with a dry cloth may scratch the disk.
• Do not write on the disk or affix labels to it.
— Operation Guide
v
Important
Storing produced data
Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken operation. We recommend that you store all important data on CD-R or CD-RW disks or other external
storage medium.
Responsibility for loss of data, etc.
• Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages (including consequential or incidental) incurred by the customer or any third party as a result of
loss or impairment of the data stored on the CD-R media, regardless of
whether such loss could have been or actually was foreseen by Yamaha.
• Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect that may render it
unusable.
Cautions for handling optional equipment
• For inquiries concerning I/O card, hard disk, or CD-RW drive handling,
please consult your Yamaha dealer.
• Always switch off the power for the main unit and all peripherals, unplug the
power cord for the main unit from the outlet, then disconnect the cables connecting the main unit with the peripherals before starting installation work.
• Wear thick gloves when working on this equipment to avoid cutting your
hands on metal fittings or the like on the main unit, I/O card, hard disk, or
CD-RW drive.
• Always touch a well-grounded metal surface or the like to fully discharge any
static electric charge on your body and clothing before starting to work on
this equipment.
• Take extreme care to avoid touching any terminals or board surface parts.
• In order to protect the electronic circuits of the I/O card, hard disk, CD-RW
drive, etc. from damage due to static electricity, when handling any of this
equipment, take the most extreme care to avoid touching IC leads or other
electronic parts.
• Be careful not to drop any screws into the main unit. If you switch the power
on with a dropped screw still in the main unit, the main unit may malfunction
or break down. If a dropped screw can not be retrieved, consult your Yamaha
dealer.
• If the hard disk or CD-RW drive breaks down, contact the store where you
purchased that equipment.
Except for duplication for personal use or when there is no copyright problem,
the duplication or transfer of commercially sold music/sound data without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited. When using this equipment,
please consult with a copyright specialist.
vi
— Operation Guide
Important
❍ Warning
The Yamaha Professional Audio Workstation is designed to be used professionally
and responsibly by recording industry professionals. The reproduction, distribution, or, in some instances, the public performance, of all or a portion of a sound
recording or musical composition protected by copyright, without having
obtained a proper license from the relevant copyright holders, may constitute
copyright infringement and may otherwise violate copyright laws and other laws.
In addition, laws (such as the Audio Home Recording Act and the Digital Millennium Copyright Act in USA) contain certain restrictions and requirements that
may apply to your use of works protected by copyright and related information
and data that may accompany such works. Violation of such laws may result in
civil remedies and, in some cases, criminal liability.
Because violations of copyright laws may be serious offenses, you should consult
a lawyer familiar with the law of copyright, including all laws that may be applicable to your use of the Workstation (such as the Audio Home Recording Act and
the Digital Millennium Copyright Act in USA), if you have any questions regarding your intended use of all or parts of sound recordings or musical compositions
protected by copyright.
— Operation Guide
vii
Table of contents
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha AW4416 audio workstation. In order
to take full advantage of the AW4416’s functionality and enjoy trouble-free
operation, please carefully read the “Operation Guide” (this manual) and
the separate “Reference Manual” and “Tutorial.”
Table of contents
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Checking the included items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an internal hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the internal hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a CD-RW drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the CD-RW drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
2
3
5
5
The SCSI ID of the CD-RW drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Removing the transport protection pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
How to remove the transport protection pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Manual eject (emergency disc removal). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Attaching an external SCSI device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
About external SCSI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
About terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
About SCSI errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installing I/O cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About I/O cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Important points you must observe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Turning the power on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Turning the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting the internal clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Turning the power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transporting the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Vibration during use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chapter 1
Welcome to the world of the AW4416. . . . . . . . .19
Features of the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mixer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Recorder section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sampling pad section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
viii
— Operation Guide
Table of contents
CD-RW drive (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Signal flow within the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input channels 1–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return channels 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recorder input patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor channels 1–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital cascade connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stereo output channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buses 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX buses 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal effects 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor output/headphone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
Parts and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog input/output section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WORK NAVIGATE section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIT section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIXER section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FADER MODE section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIXING LAYER section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[SEL] keys, [ON] keys, faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level meter/counter section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECORDER section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMATION section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCENE MEMORY section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSOR/JOG & SHUTTLE section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locate section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAMPLING PAD section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3
22
23
24
25
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
31
31
32
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
41
42
43
44
45
46
50
The user interface of the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level meters/counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic operation of the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing a screen/page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
54
56
56
Using the controls of the top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
— Operation Guide
ix
Table of contents
Using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Turning a button on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the controls of the top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Editing the value of a fader/knob/numerical box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the controls of the top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the additional function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the controls of the top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Inputting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using the controls of the tab page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Selecting channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 4
Connections and setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Word clock settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chapter 5
Recording on the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Preparations for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections and start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a new song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording the first tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign the signals to buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the tracks to record-ready mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Let’s record!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overdubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign the signal to a bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Put the track in record-ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using EQ and the dynamics processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
73
75
78
78
81
82
83
85
87
87
88
89
90
91
Using the four-band EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using the dynamics processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Let’s overdub! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Mixdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating the mix balance of the tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Using the Solo function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Using the internal effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Other convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fader groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Mute groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
x
— Operation Guide
Table of contents
Recording the stereo track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Saving a scene/song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Saving a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Saving a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 6
Transport/locate operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table of transport key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Shuttle function (cue/review operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Nudge function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using the Nudge function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Nudge function settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rollback function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Locating to a specific point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Locating to the zero location of the counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Setting the zero relative time location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Locating to the start/end points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
A-B repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Setting the A/B points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Performing A-B repeat playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
In/out points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setting the In point/Out point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Setting a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Locating to a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adjusting the location of a locate point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Deleting a locate point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Deleting a locate point using the panel keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Deleting an In/Out point or A/B point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Deleting a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Chapter 7
Punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
About punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Manual punch-in/out (→ P.128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Auto punch-in/out (→ P.130). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Manual punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Make input monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Connect a foot switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Manual punch-in/out recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Auto punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Make input monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Set the auto punch-in/out points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Set the pre-roll/post-roll times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rehearsing and recording with auto punch-in/out. . . . . . . . . . . 131
Rehearsing with auto punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Recording with auto punch-in/out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
— Operation Guide
xi
Table of contents
Chapter 8
Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Patching to the input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patching to the recorder inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patching to the outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
135
136
138
Storing to the patch library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Recalling a patch program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Patching input/output jacks to an insert I/O point . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Using the Quick Rec function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 9
Track and virtual track operations. . . . . . . . . . .147
The track structure of the AW4416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching virtual tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing tracks and virtual tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracks, parts, and regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming a virtual track or region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
149
151
152
152
153
Naming a virtual track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Naming a region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Track editing procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual track editing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACK menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PART menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGION menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
159
161
161
162
163
Chapter 10 Internal effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
About the internal effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using AUX send/return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Inserting an effect into a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using AUX send/return to apply an effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Recalling an effect program from the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Switching between pre-fader and post-fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Adjusting the send level/return level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Adjusting the send level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Inserting an effect into a desired channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Inserting an effect into monitor channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Recalling an effect program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Chapter 11 Song management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
About songs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Song structure and size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Song structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
xii
— Operation Guide
Table of contents
Usable hard disks/song capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Work area for audio CD production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Saving/loading a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Saving the current song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Loading a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Editing the song name/comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Deleting/copying a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Deleting a song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Copying a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Optimizing a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Importing mixer data of an existing song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Chapter 12 Sampling pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
About the sampling pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning the pad outputs to channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning a region to a sampling pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trimming a sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming a pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing a pad sample and name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording your performance on the sampling pads . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a pad performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing a pad performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185
186
187
190
193
194
196
198
201
Chapter 13 Scene memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
About scene memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Parameters included in a scene. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
About scene numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Storing a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the name of a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the order of scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using keys to store/recall a scene. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling a scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
206
207
208
209
211
211
212
Chapter 14 Automix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
What is automix? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a new automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording the first section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing back automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overwriting events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automix punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
— Operation Guide
213
214
216
218
219
221
xiii
Table of contents
Editing the fader movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing automix off-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing an automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling an automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
225
228
230
Chapter 15 MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
What you can do using MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI connectors and the TO HOST connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the TO HOST connector for direct connection to your
computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the PORT SELECT parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching AW4416 scenes from an external device . . . . . . . . . . .
Using MTC to synchronize the AW4416 and a MIDI sequencer . .
Using MIDI Clock to synchronize the AW4416 and a MIDI
sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using MMC to control the AW4416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
232
233
233
234
235
238
240
243
Chapter 16 Backing up and restoring songs . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Selecting the backup format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backing up a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring a song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting the internal hard disk/external SCSI device. . . . . . . .
245
246
248
250
250
Formatting the internal hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Formatting an external hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Formatting removable media such as an MO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Erasing CD-RW media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Chapter 17 Mastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
About mastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stereo tracks that can be mastered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD-R and CD-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track At Once and Disc At Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparations for mastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
255
256
257
258
Mastering mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Writing the master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Finalizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Playing CD-R/RW media (the CD Play function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
xiv
— Operation Guide
Before you begin
This chapter explains preparations you need to make before using the
AW4416, such as checking the included items and installing options.
Checking the included items
Please make sure that the package contains the following items. If any items are
missing, please contact your dealer.
• AW4416 mixer/recorder unit: 1
• Operation guide (this document): 1
• Reference guide: 1
• Tutorial: 1
• Power supply cable: 1
• CD-ROM: 1
• Red and white cable for CD-RW drive (four conductor): 1
• Screws for installing 2.5 inch hard disk/CD-RW drive: 8
• ADP25H 2.5 inch hard disk adapter: 1 (pre-installed in the 2.5" HARD DISK
DRIVE slot on the rear panel of the AW4416)
❍ Trademarks
ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis
are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark
and Tascam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation. MS-DOS is a
registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Yamaha is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
❍ Copyright
No part of the AW4416 software or the manuals may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of
Yamaha Corporation.
© 2000 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved.
❍ Yamaha website
<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/homeenglish/>
— Operation Guide
1
Before you begin
Installing an internal hard disk
You must install a hard disk in the AW4416 before using it. If you attempt to use
the AW4416 without installing a hard disk, the recorder section and mixer section will fail to operate correctly, and the AW4416 will be damaged as well.
About the internal hard disk
On the AW4416, all data necessary for reproducing a composition (mixer settings, recorder settings, audio data etc.) is stored on the hard disk as a “song.”
An internal hard disk is attached to the ADP25H 2.5 inch hard disk adapter and
installed in the 2.5" HARD DISK DRIVE slot located on the rear panel. Hard disks
with the following specifications can be used.
• Type: IDE 2.5 inch (attachment location conforms to SFF-8201)
• Thickness: no particular limitation
• Capacity: no particular limitation (however, the AW4416 can use a maximum
capacity of 64 GB)
• Models known to work: consult your local Yamaha distributor or refer to the
website at the following URL.
<http://www.aw4416.com/>
• By “models known to work,” we mean commercially available models that
Yamaha has obtained, installed in the AW4416, and successfully tested by
means of various operational tests. However, we cannot take into account
slight differences in performance that may occur due to the manufacturing tolerances of each manufacturer.
• Hard disks are precision devices. Strong physical shock, magnetism, static
electricity, or excessive current etc. can damage the data on a hard disk. You
must use media such as an external SCSI device or CD-RW to backup your
important musical data.
• Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will accept no responsibility for any
damages, neither direct nor indirect, resulting from the use of any of the above
hard disks.
2
— Operation Guide
Before you begin
Installation
Please read and observe the cautions on installing optional equipment listed at
the beginning of this manual.
Here’s how to attach a 2.5 inch IDE hard disk to the ADP25H hard disk adapter
included with the AW4416, and install it into the appropriate slot of the
AW4416.
• Hard disks are precision devices. Do not subject them to physical shock or
static electricity, etc.
• Do not place a hard disk nearby devices that produce a strong magnetic field,
or in locations of extreme cold, heat, or moisture.
• Before you handle a hard disk, touch your hand to a grounded metallic object
to release any static charge that may be present in your body or clothing. If you
fail to do so, static electricity may damage the hard disk.
• Never attempt to disassemble a hard disk or apply excessive force to it.
• The AW4416 is shipped with four screws for attaching a 2.5 inch hard disk,
and four screws for attaching a CD-RW drive, making a total of eight included
screws of the same type.
1. You will need the following items.
• The AW4416 itself
• A 2.5 inch IDE hard disk (sold separately) for installation
• Four screws included with the AW4416 for attaching the 2.5 inch hard disk
• A philips (+) screwdriver
2. Make sure that the power of the AW4416 is turned off. For safety’s sake,
disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet.
3. On the rear panel of the AW4416, remove the two screws that hold the
ADP25H 2.5 inch hard disk adapter to the 2.5" HARD DISK DRIVE slot.
ADP25H
(2.5 inch hard disk adapter)
— Operation Guide
3
Before you begin
4. Place the hard disk on the ADP25H as shown in the diagram below,
align the screw holes of the hard disk and the ADP25H, and use your
screwdriver to fasten the screws at the four locations shown.
Flat cable
5. Plug the connector of the flat cable extending from the ADP25H into
the connector of the hard disk.
Flat cable connector
• Even if it is difficult to plug in the connector, do not use excessive pressure to
force it in. This may damage the hard disk, or you may injure yourself.
6. Aligning the ADP25H (with the hard disk attached) with the rails inside
the 2.5" HARD DISK DRIVE slot, push it in until it clicks into place.
7. Use the screws that you removed in step 3 to fasten the ADP25H into
the 2.5" HARD DISK DRIVE slot.
If you fail to tighten the screws all the way, the hard disk may vibrate and fail to
operate correctly.
• Do not turn on the power of the AW4416 until all options have been installed.
• When you turn on the power of the AW4416 after installing a new hard disk,
formatting of the hard disk will begin automatically (→ P.15).
4
— Operation Guide
Before you begin
Installing a CD-RW drive
About the CD-RW drives
A CD-RW drive is an option that allows you to create music CD’s, to backup/
restore internal hard disk data, to play a music CD or to read a CD-ROM. An
internal-type CD-RW drive can be installed by removing the CD-RW drive cover
from the front panel. CD-RW drives with the following specifications can be
used.
• Interface: SCSI-2
• Models known to work: consult your local Yamaha distributor or refer to the
website at the following URL.
<http://www.aw4416.com/>
• By “models known to work,” we mean commercially available models that
Yamaha has obtained, installed in the AW4416, and successfully tested by
means of various operational tests. However, we cannot take into account
slight differences in performance that may occur due to the manufacturing tolerances of each manufacturer.
• Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will accept no responsibility for any
damages, neither direct nor indirect, resulting from the use of any of the above
CD-RW drives.
* Note that the cover panel of the AW4416 cannot be attached to a CD-RW
drive with a lid-type tray. The AW4416’s cover panel can be attached to a CDRW drive with a tray of the following dimensions.
Maximum 138 mm
❒ The SCSI ID of the CD-RW drive
• The SCSI ID of the AW4416 itself is fixed at “6.” For this reason, you must set
the SCSI ID of the CD-RW drive to “6” before installing it.
— Operation Guide
5
Before you begin
• In the various screens of the AW4416, the SCSI ID of the internal CD-RW
drive has been set to “3” by default. For this reason, you will find it convenient to set the ID of the CD-RW to “3.” (For details on setting the SCSI ID,
refer to the manual for your CD-RW drive.)
• If you are installing a CD-RW drive manufactured by Yamaha, the SCSI ID will
be set to “3” at the factory, and we recommend that you leave it at this setting.
Installation procedure
Please carefully read the cautions for installing optional equipment given at the
beginning of this manual.
1. You will need the following items.
• The AW4416 itself
• Internal CD-RW drive (option)
• Screws (included with the AW4416) for attaching the CD-RW drive
• Red and white cable for CD-RW drive (four conductor)
• Philips (+) screwdriver
• Work surface
• In order to install the CD-RW drive you will need to turn the AW4416 on its
back. Make sure that you have a sufficiently broad work surface.
• The AW4416 is shipped with four screws for attaching the 2.5 inch hard disk,
and four screws for attaching the CD-RW drive, making a total of eight screws
of the same type.
2. Make sure that the power of the AW4416 is turned off. For safety’s sake,
disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet.
3. Turn the AW4416 upside down on the work surface.
When turning the AW4416 upside down, we recommend that you use the packing foam from the AW4416’s shipping carton as shown in the diagram at above,
so that the controls of the top panel are not damaged. If the packing foam is not
available, please spread out a soft cloth, and support each of the four corners of
the AW4416 with a stack of magazines etc.
6
— Operation Guide
Before you begin
4. Remove the CD-RW drive cover from the front panel, and remove the
bottom panel.
Bottom panel
CD-R/RW drive
cover panel
5. Turn the CD-RW drive over, and insert it little by little, stopping when
the connector end of the CD-RW drive enters the opening in the bottom
of the AW4416.
6. Connect the red and white four-conductor cable included with the
AW4416 to the internal connector of the AW4416 as shown in the diagram. Then connect the cable to the connector of the CD-RW drive.
— Operation Guide
7
Before you begin
7. Plug the connector of the flat cable (extending from inside the AW4416)
into the connector of the CD-RW drive.
8. Align the screw holes in the bottom of the CD-RW drive with the screw
holes of the AW4416, and use a screwdriver to fasten the drive with the
four included screws.
9. Re-attach the CD-RW drive cover and the bottom panel that you
removed in step 3. At this time, remove the inner cover from the CD-RW
drive cover.
Bottom panel
CD-R/RW drive
cover panel
Inner cover
8
— Operation Guide
Before you begin
Removing the transport protection
pad
When CD-RW drives are shipped, the disc tray contains a transport protection
pad that protects the internal mechanism from physical shock suffered during
shipment. Please remove this protective pad before use.
い
ずしてくださtion
輸送用パッド
porta use.
ご使用前には
for trans
it before le transport
Pad
Removection pour
usage.
rnen.
er avant er
Prote
ahme entfe
A enlevsport
polst
Inbetriebn
Tran
Vor der
い
ずしてくださtion
輸送用パッド
porta use.
ご使用前には
for trans
it before le transport
Pad
Removection pour
usage.
rnen.
er avant er
Prote
ahme entfe
A enlevsport
polst
Inbetriebn
Tran
Vor der
* This diagram shows a CD-RW
drive manufactured by Yamaha
Corporation.
Be sure to save the transport protection pad for the next time you need to transport the unit.
How to remove the transport protection pad
1. Install the CD-RW drive in the AW4416.
2. Turn on the power of the AW4416.
Set the SCSI ID number as necessary (→ P.259).
3. Press the [CD PLAY] key, and then press the [SHIFT] + [F2] keys to open
the disc tray.
4. Remove the transport protection pad.
Before transporting the unit, reverse this procedure to insert the pad.
— Operation Guide
9
Before you begin
Manual eject (emergency disc removal)
Manual eject allows you to remove the disc manually in the case of an emergency such as a malfunction of the disc tray mechanism (usually temporary) or a
power failure. Please be aware that using this method frequently can cause the
CD-RW drive to malfunction. For the location of the eject hole and the procedure, refer to the manual of your CD-RW drive.
In order to perform this operation, you will need a pin-like object 2 mm or less in
diameter, such as a straightened paper clip.
Insert a pin-like object 2 mm
or less in diameter.
Eject Hall
* This diagram shows a CD-RW drive
manufactured by Yamaha Corporation.
Attaching an external SCSI device
About external SCSI devices
The external SCSI devices referred to here are storage devices used to backup/
restore the internal data of the AW4416, and can be connected to the SCSI connector on the rear panel of the AW4416. The following types of storage device
can be used.
• Type of drive: MO drives (128 MB, 230 MB, 540MB, 640 MB 1.3 GB), hard
disk drives, CD-RW drives
• Interface: SCSI-2
• Models known to work: consult your local Yamaha distributor or refer to the
website at the following URL.
<http://www.aw4416.com/>
• By “models known to work,” we mean commercially available models that
Yamaha has obtained, connected to the AW4416, and successfully tested by
means of various operational tests. However, we cannot take into account
slight differences in performance that may occur due to the manufacturing tolerances of each manufacturer.
• Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will accept no responsibility for any
damages, neither direct nor indirect, resulting from the use of any of the above
storage devices.
It is not possible to directly record or play back audio signals in realtime on an
external storage device connected to the SCSI connector.
10
— Operation Guide
Before you begin
Connection procedure
1. Make sure that the power is turned off for the AW4416 and for the
external SCSI device(s), and use a SCSI cable to connect the SCSI connectors of each device.
When connecting an external SCSI device, use only high impedance SCSI cables
of 100 ohms (±10 ohms) impedance that are 1 meter or shorter in length.
Use only good-quality SCSI cables.
SCSI
connector
SCSI connector
SCSI connector
External SCSI device 1
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
AW4416
ID=6 (fixed)
Terminator
SCSI connector
SCSI connector
External SCSI device 2
Internal CD-RW
ID-3 (default setting)
Note
• A maximum of seven SCSI devices (SCSI ID= 0–5,7) can be connected in a
daisy-chain (including the internal CD-RW drive).
• When connecting multiple SCSI devices, you must make sure that the SCSI ID
of each device (including the internal CD-RW drive) does not conflict with any
other device. (For details on how to set the SCSI ID, refer to the manuals for
your SCSI devices.)
• The SCSI ID of the AW4416 itself is fixed at “6.”
• In the various screens of the AW4416, the SCSI ID of the internal CD-RW drive
has been set to “3” by default. For this reason, if you install a CD-RW drive,
you will find it convenient to set its ID to “3.” (For details on setting the SCSI
ID, refer to the manual for your CD-RW drive.)
• If you install a CD-RW drive manufactured by Yamaha, the SCSI ID will be set
to “3” at the factory, and we recommend that you leave it at this setting.
2. Attach a terminator to the last SCSI device in the chain.
A “terminator” is a device that terminates the SCSI signal at the end of the chain,
and is normally attached to the vacant SCSI connector of the last device in the
daisy chain. If the SCSI device has an active terminator (a circuit that terminates
the signal electrically), turn it on. (For details of how to turn on the active terminator, refer to the manual of your SCSI device.)
Before using an external SCSI device, you will need to format it. For details on
this procedure, refer to page 250.
— Operation Guide
11
Before you begin
❒ About terminators
“Termination” refers to the process of applying a resistor appropriate for the
impedance of the SCSI bus to terminate the end of the circuit. The resistor
required for this is called the “terminator.” Normally, a terminator must be
installed at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus (in the case of the example
shown above, this would be the AW4416 itself, and the SCSI device connected to
the end of the daisy chain).
However, this is only a general principle, and is not an absolute. Depending on
the combination of SCSI devices, the order of connection, or on the length of the
SCSI cables, there may be cases in which better results are obtained by terminating only one end of the chain. If problems occur such as the AW4416 failing to
start up when an external SCSI device is connected, try defeating one of the terminators. (For details on how to defeat the internal terminator of the AW4416,
refer to “UTILITY screen → Prefer. 3 page” in the Reference Guide.)
❒ About SCSI errors
The SCSI bus is able to transfer data in a stable manner only if all connected SCSI
devices are operating correctly. If the SCSI bus of the AW4416 is connected to a
device whose operation is unstable or which produces noise, errors may occur in
other devices, or the AW4416 may fail to start up correctly. If such problems
occur, check the following points.
❍ Check the SCSI ID
Make sure that the SCSI ID of each SCSI device (including the AW4416 and the
internal CD-RW drive) does not conflict with the SCSI ID of any other device. The
SCSI ID of the AW4416 is fixed at “6.”
❍ Check the terminator
Check the location of the terminator. Under certain conditions, better results may
be obtained by terminating only one end of the SCSI chain.
❍ Check the SCSI cables
Since errors are often caused by low-quality SCSI cables or unnecessarily long
SCSI cables, you should avoid using such cables. Please use double-shielded
cables that are as short as possible. It is also important that the shield within the
cable is grounded to the connector.
❍ External SCSI devices with 25-pin connectors
Most SCSI cables with 25-pin connectors at both ends do not meet SCSI specifications. For this reason if the system includes a SCSI device that uses a 25-pin
connector, the problems may be due to this type of cable.
12
— Operation Guide
Before you begin
Installing I/O cards
About I/O cards
I/O cards compatible with the Yamaha mini-YGDAI format can be installed in the
OPTION I/O slots 1/2 located on the rear panel of the AW4416 in order to add
input/output ports. For example by installing an ADAT format compatible I/O
card into an OPTION I/O slot, you can transmit/receive eight channels of digital
audio to/from an ADAT format digital recorder.
At present, the following types of I/O cards can be used.
❍ MY8-AT
This card transmits and receives eight channels of Alesis ADAT format digital signals.
❍ MY8-TD
This card transmits and receives eight channels of TASCAM format digital signals.
❍ MY8-AE
This card transmits and receives eight channels of AES/EBU format digital signals.
❍ MY8-AD
This is an A/D card with eight channels of analog input jacks (balanced TRS
phone jacks).
❍ MY4-AD
This is an A/D card with four channels of analog input jacks (balanced XLR jacks).
❍ MY4-DA
This is a D/A card with four channels of analog output jacks (balanced XLR
jacks).
For up-to-date information on available MY cards, contact your local Yamaha distributor or check the following website.
<http://www.aw4416.com/>
Some types of MY card sold by other manufacturers may be usable only in SLOT
1 or 2.
— Operation Guide
13
Before you begin
Installation procedure
Please carefully read the cautions for installing optional devices, given at the
beginning of this manual.
1. Make sure that the power of the AW4416 is turned off. For safety’s sake,
disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet.
2. From the OPTION I/O slot located on the rear panel of the AW4416,
remove the two screws that hold the cover in place.
Please keep the cover and screws you removed in a safe place.
3. Slide the I/O card along the rails inside the slot until it clicks into place.
4. Tighten the two screws included with the I/O card to fasten the card
securely.
Please note that if the screws are loose, the card may not be grounded correctly.
14
— Operation Guide
Important points you
must observe
Turning the power on or off
You must use the following procedure to turn the power of the AW4416 on or off.
❒ Turning the power on
To turn on the power of a system that includes the AW4416, you must turn on the
power switches in the following order.
1 Storage devices connected to the AW4416’s SCSI connector, and external
sound sources connected to the input/output jacks
B The AW4416 itself
C The monitor system connected to the output jacks of the AW4416
If the SCSI device is turned on after the AW4416 is turned on, it will not function
correctly.
After the opening screen appears in the display of the AW4416, a TRACK screen
like the following will appear.
When the AW4416 is first turned on after a new internal hard disk has been
installed, the display will ask “Format OK? [Y (Enter)/N (Any)].” If you now press
the [ENTER] key, formatting of the hard disk will begin automatically. When formatting is completed, the screen shown above will appear.
Never turn off the power of the AW4416 while formatting is in progress. Doing
so may damage the hard disk itself.
— Operation Guide
15
Important points you must observe
Setting the internal clock
When the AW4416 is shipped from the factory, its internal clock is set to Japan
time. When you create a song on the AW4416, the song will store the date and
time using this internal time.
If it becomes necessary to reset the internal clock after replacing a run-down battery or for any other reason, use the following procedure.
1. Press the [UTILITY] key → [F4] key.
The UTILITY screen Prefer.3 page will appear.
Use the CURSOR [ ] key to move the cursor to the square frame of the Y (year)
field in the CLOCK area, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to input the year. In the
same way, input M (month), D (date), h (hour), m (minute), and s (second). (W is
the day of the week, and will be set automatically.)
The time you specified will blink. Move the cursor to the SET button to confirm
the setting, or to the RESET button to cancel, and then press the [ENTER] key. The
internal clock of the AW4416 will be set to the specified time. If you select the
RESET button and press the [ENTER] key, the clock will return to the previous
state.
16
— Operation Guide
Important points you must observe
❒ Turning the power off
To turn off the power of a system that includes the AW4416, you must turn off the
power switches in the following order.
1 The monitor system connected to the output jacks of the AW4416
B The AW4416 itself
C Storage devices connected to the AW4416’s SCSI connector, and external
sound sources connected to the input/output jacks
Before turning off the power of the AW4416 itself, you must perform the following shut-down procedure.
❍ Shut-down operation
1. In the WORK NAVIGATE section located in the upper left of the
AW4416’s top panel, press the [SONG] key.
2. Below the display, press the [F5] (Shut Down) key.
3. The CURRENT SONG STATUS screen will appear, allowing you to check
the content of the last-saved song.
The data for the current song (date, size, quantization bits, protect) shown here in
the song list is the data for when the song was last saved. When you perform the
following Save procedure and press the [ENTER] key, it will be overwritten by the
new data.
Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key.
A message will ask you whether you wish to save the current song.
4. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys in the center right of the top
panel to move the cursor (the blinking rectangle) to the OK button, and
press the [ENTER] key located immediately below.
5. When the “Now safe to turn off” message appears, turn off the [POWER]
switch located on the rear panel.
• If you turn off the power of the AW4416 without performing the shut-down
procedure described at the above, the audio data on the hard disk may be lost.
• Never turn off the power while the access indicator in the level meter/counter
is lit, since this may damage the hard disk itself.
• If lightning is occurring nearby, disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet. The AW4416 can be damaged by lightning.
— Operation Guide
17
Important points you must observe
Transporting the AW4416
When transporting the AW4416, you must disconnect all cables, and pack it in
the packing foam in which the unit was shipped (or the equivalent). If a CD-RW
drive (option) is installed, insert the protective pad that was included with it into
the drive.
• If you transport the AW4416 without packing it as described at the above, any
damage or malfunctions that occur during transport may not be covered under
warranty.
• Even if the AW4416 is packed as described at the above, any damage or malfunctions that occur due to dropping the unit etc. may not be covered under
warranty. Please handle the AW4416 with care.
Vibration during use
The internal hard disk or CD-RW drive of the AW4416 are very sensitive to vibration. Do not allow them to be subject to vibration or shock during operation, and
do not move the AW4416 while its power is turned on.
In particular, you must never apply physical shock or vibration while the access
indicator of the level meter/counter is lit, since this may damage the hard disk
itself.
18
— Operation Guide
1
Welcome to the world
of the AW4416
This chapter explains the features and basic concepts of the AW4416, and
outlines the signal flow.
Features of the AW4416
The AW4416 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer, hard disk
recorder, multi-effects, and sampling pads. It is the only equipment you need to
perform the entire music production process, from multi-track recording, mixing,
audio editing, effect processing, and creating a final CD(*1). In the following
pages of this manual, the functionality of each section is described separately.
*1. An optional internal/external CD-RW drive is required.
❒ Mixer section
❍ Professional-quality audio with 32 bit internal processing
The AW4416 carries on the technology made famous on the de-facto standard for
digital consoles — the Yamaha 02R. Internal processing is performed with 32 bit
precision (54 bit precision for EQ) to guarantee the highest possible audio quality.
❍ Up to 44 input channels and 20 buses, rivaling even large consoles
A total of 44 mixing inputs are provided, with 8 analog inputs, digital stereo
input, 16 (maximum) digital/analog inputs via the OPTION I/O slot, in addition
to 16 recorder monitor channels, and 2 return channels. Output buses total 20,
with 8 group buses, 8 AUX buses, stereo bus, and SOLO bus (stereo). With a bus
configuration that rivals large consoles, the AW4416 can handle a wide variety of
applications.
❍ Four-band EQ and dynamics processing on each channel
Every input as well as the stereo output channel provides the same powerful fourband full-parametric EQ and dynamics processor as on the 02R. (The two return
channels are excepted.)
Each band of the EQ is fully adjustable in the range of ±18 dB/f= 20 Hz–20 kHz/
Q= 41 points. The dynamics processor provides compressor, gate, ducking,
expander, and compander functionality. Key-in and stereo link are also supported
for precise control of the input signals.
❍ Two high-quality multi-effect processors are built-in
Two multi-effect processors provide spatial effects such as reverb and delay, modulation effects such as chorus and flanger, and guitar effects such as distortion
and amp simulator.
In addition to using these via the AUX bus send/return, they can be inserted into a
channel or the stereo bus. A high-impedance jack for direct connection of an
electric guitar is also provided.
— Operation Guide
19
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
❍ Scenes and libraries
Faders locations and mix parameters for each channel, together with effect settings, can be stored as a scene.
Up to 96 scenes can be used for each song. Scenes that you save can be recalled
instantly using the top panel keys, or by transmitting program change messages
from an external MIDI device. Libraries for storing EQ, dynamics processor, and
channel settings are also provided.
❍ Full mixing automation
The AW4416 features seventeen 60 mm motorized faders.
In addition to the ability to recall scene memories and libraries, the AW4416 provides fully automated mixing that records fader/pan/EQ movements in realtime.
❒ Recorder section
❍ High capacity hard disk up to 64 GB(*2)
An internal hard disk (2.5 inch IDE type) of up to 64 GB (maximum 6.4 GB per
song) is supported.
A hard disk attached to the ADP25H cartridge (sold separately) can be inserted
into the hard disk slot of the AW4416, allowing you to exchange hard disks as
easily and conveniently as if you were using removable media.
*2. Hard disks are sold separately.
❍ Efficient data management
All of the audio data (multi-track and stereo track), scene memories, libraries, and
automix data used in a song are managed on the internal hard disk as a “Song.”
A desired song can be recalled from disk at any time. Songs can also be backed
up on an external hard disk, MO disk, or CD-R/RW disc.
❍ 16×8 virtual tracks + stereo track
A single song consists of 16 tracks × 8 virtual tracks + stereo track (total of 130
tracks).
The quantization (16 bit/24 bit) and sampling frequency (44.1 kHz/48 kHz) can
be selected for each song. 16 tracks can be recorded simultaneously, or 16 tracks
played back while recording 8 tracks simultaneously, making the AW4416 an
ideal choice for live recording or for re-recording or ping-ponging from an external recorder. The 16 tracks can also be mixed down directly to the stereo track.
This has the advantage not only of making a master recorder unnecessary, but
also of allowing multi-track and two-track mix data to be managed together.
❍ Versatile editing functionality
Data can be edited freely at every level — song, track, part, and region.
Editing functions include “time compression” that allows you to compress or
expand time over a range of 50%–200%, and “pitch change” that can modify the
pitch as far as an octave upward or downward. Editing is non-destructive, allowing up to fifteen levels of undo/redo.
❍ Locate functions, and auto punch-in/out
A total of eight locate keys are provided: start, end, RTZ, A, B, in, out, and rollback. In addition, you can set 99 markers for each song, making it fast and easy
to locate to any desired point. Auto punch-in/out at the specified punch-in and
punch-out points is also provided. The AW4416 also has a built-in click metronome linked with the tempo map.
20
— Operation Guide
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
❒ Sampling pad section
❍ Assign 16 sounds to the sampling pads
Sixteen sounds can be assigned to the eight pads with switchable A/B banks.
Sounds can be sampled into these pads at the same 16 bit/24 bit and 44.1 kHz/
48 kHz audio quality as for recording. Sampling sources can be taken from a
sound file on hard disk, an audio CD inserted in the CD-RW drive, or from a
WAV file on a SCSI device. The playback timing can be recorded on a special
sequencer track, and edited later. Pad polyphony is eight notes, and a total of
approximately 90 seconds can be sampled in the pads (16 bit/44.1 kHz).
❒ CD-RW drive (option)
❍ CD-RW drive(*3) can be installed internally
You can produce an audio CD off-line, using stereo tracks from the hard disk. This
allows entire process from recording to CD production to be completed within a
single unit. The CD-RW drive can also be used to store recorded data, making
backups easy. Playback of audio CD’s and loading from CD-ROM is also supported, allowing these to be used as sources for the sampling pads.
*3. A CD-RW drive is optional.
❒ Other features
❍ Simple panel layout and efficient operation
The AW4416 features a large backlit LCD and a three-color FL display, providing
a graphic user interface that can be used intuitively and efficiently. A serial mouse
(9 pin D-sub connector) can also be connected.
❍ Two I/O card option slots
Two slots support a variety of formats including ADAT, TASCAM, AES/EBU, and
analog. The AW4416 is designed with an open architecture for superb expandability.
❍ Sophisticated connectivity
TO HOST connector and SCSI connector (SCSI-2) are standard, ensuring easy
connection to computers, external SCSI devices(*4), and MIDI devices. WORD
CLOCK IN/OUT connectors are also provided to allow the construction of digital
systems for a variety of applications. In addition, MTC/MIDI clock can be used
for synchronization, and MMC commands can control the AW4416 from an
external device.
*4. External SCSI devices can be used only to back up data. They cannot be used to
record audio data directly.
— Operation Guide
21
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
Signal flow within the AW4416
The following diagram shows the general signal flow of the AW4416. As you can
see from this diagram, the AW4416 consists of several sections: input patch, output patch, mixer, sampling pads, recorder, and CD-RW drive (optional).
OPTION I/O
slot 1
×8
OPTION I/O
slot 2
×8
×2
DIGITAL STEREO
IN connector
Buses 1–8
STEREO bus
AUX buses 1–8
SOLO bus
×2
Effect
1/2
×4
Output patch
I/O
card
Input channels 1–24
Effect returns 1/2
Monitor channels 1–16
Input patch
I/O
card
Mixer section
×8
INPUT jacks 1–8
×8
×8
OPTION I/O
slot 2
×2
×2
×2
Channel insert I/O
Stereo bus insert I/O
×2
×8
×16
×2
I/O
card
I/O
card
STEREO OUT jacks
DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
MONITOR OUT jacks
PHONES jack
Effect
1/2
×16
×2
OMNI OUT jacks 1–4
OPTION I/O
slot 1
×2
D-RAM
CD Writing
Import
Trigger
A
B
Audio
File
Data Backup/
Restore
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sampling pads section
Recorder section
CD-RW
Drive
AW4416
The signal flow within each section is explained in detail in the pages that follow.
22
— Operation Guide
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
Input patch
The input patch section is where input signals are assigned to input channels 1–
24 and return channels 1/2. The following types of input signal can be selected.
❍ MIC/LINE INPUT
Input signals from analog INPUT jacks 1–8.
❍ OPTION IN
Input signals from an I/O card installed in rear panel OPTION I/O slots 1/2. Up to
8 channels of signal can be input simultaneously from a single I/O card.
❍ SAMPLING PAD
Output signals of pads 1–8 in the sampling pad section.
❍ EFFECT 1/2
Return signals from internal effects 1/2.
❍ DIGITAL STEREO IN
Input signals from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack.
❍ METRONOME
The playback of the internal metronome.
The following input signals can be assigned to each channel.
Input channel 1–24
(mono)
Return channel
1 (stereo)
Return channel
2 (stereo)
MIC/LINE INPUT
O
O
O
OPTION IN
O
O
O
SAMPLING PAD
O
EFFECT 1
O
EFFECT 2
O
DIGITAL STEREO IN
O
METRONOME
O
O
O
— Operation Guide
23
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
MIC/LINE
INPUT
48V
PEAK
INPUT
1-2
AD
INSERT
I/O
INPUT 1-24
PEAK
AD
INPUT PATCH
INPUT
3-8
Hi-z
8 ch
ONLY
OPTION IN
8
SLOT1
8
SLOT2
SAMPLING
PAD
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
8
DIGITAL
STEREO IN
2
DeEmp
RETURN 1/2
DeEmp
2
2
DeEmp
METRONOME
Input channels 1–24
METER
INPUT PATCH
METER
METER
PREFADER LISTEN/
AFTER PAN
SOLO
INSERT
ON
ATT
DYNAMICS
4 BAND EQ
METER
(EQ)
INPUT
DELAY
METER
(Gain Reduction)
LEVEL
PAN
PRE/POST
ON
AUX
Mono in X 24
DIRECT OUT
(1~16 only)
24
— Operation Guide
AUX 6
AUX 7(EFF1)
AUX 8(EFF2)
INPUT 1(...24)
...
AUX 1
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
SELECTED INSERT RETURNS
SOLO L
SOLO R
46
STEREO L
STEREO R
There are monaural input channels used mainly for inputting mics or line level
instruments. The signals input to input channels 1–24 are routed through an
attenuator, phase switch, four-band EQ, dynamics processor, and delay, and are
sent to buses 1–8, the stereo bus, or AUX buses 1–8. Input channels 1–16 have a
direct output (DIRECT OUT) function that allows their signal to be output directly
to an output jack or to the recorder section.
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
Return channels 1/2
These are stereo input channels used mainly to input the return signals from internal effects 1/2. However they can also be used as supplementary input channels
by changing the input signal assignments of the input patch section.
The structure of these channels is identical to that of the input channels, with the
exception of the following differences:
1 Stereo
B No dynamics processor
C No direct output
D No AUX 7 send level from return channel 1
E No AUX 8 send level from return channel 2
Tip!
Since return channels 1/2 are stereo, selecting MIC/LINE INPUT or OPTION IN as
input signals will cause two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered signals to be
assigned. Also if DIGITAL STEREO IN is selected, the signals of both L/R will be
assigned.
RETURN 1(...2)
METER
METER
AUX 6
AUX 7(EFF1)
AUX 8(EFF2)
...
AUX 1
SOLO L
SOLO R
STEREO L
STEREO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
• The reason that return channel 1 (2) has no send level to AUX 7 (8) is to prevent the feedback loop that would occur if the signal returned from internal
effect 1 (2) were sent back to the same internal effect.
• Be aware that the AUX 7 (8) send level is not available even if a different input
signal is assigned to return channel 1 (2).
PREFADER LISTEN/
AFTER PAN
SOLO
METER
INPUT PATCH
INSERT
ATT
METER
4 BAND EQ
METER
(EQ)
PAN
INPUT
DELAY
METER
METER
SOLO
ON LEVEL
INSERT
ATT
4 BAND EQ
INPUT
DELAY
PAN
METER
(EQ)
Stereo in X 2
PRE/POST
ON
AUX
RETURN1 can not be assigned to AUX7
(EFF1)
RETURN2 can not be assigned to AUX8
(EFF2)
— Operation Guide
25
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
Recorder input patching
This section assigns the signals that are input to tracks 1–16 of the recorder section. The following types of signal can be selected.
❍ STEREO
The stereo bus output signal that has passed through the stereo output channel.
❍ BUS 1–8
The output signal of buses 1–8.
❍ DIRECT OUT 1–16
The direct output signal of input channels 1–16.
RECORDER INPUT 1~16
INPUT PATCH
8
BUS 1~8
CH DIRECT OUT1~16
16
2
STEREO
16
RECORDER
INPUT 1(...16)
DITHER
Monitor channels 1–16
These are monaural channels that are assigned to the track 1–16 outputs of the
recorder section. According to the input monitor settings or the state of the transport, they will input either the signals being input to tracks 1–16, or the playback
signals of tracks 1–16.
As an exception, the stereo track will be patched to monitor channels 1/2 when
the stereo track of that song is being played back, and the remainder of the monitor channels 3–16 will be muted.
16
RECORDER INPUT 1-16
(FL Display)
METER
METER
METER
PREFADER LISTEN/
AFTER PAN
SOLO
METER
INPUT
MONITOR
26
RECORDER
REPRO1-16
16
RECORDER
ST Trk L/R
2
INSERT
ON
INPUT PATCH
RECORDER
ATT
RECORDER
DIRECT OUT
— Operation Guide
DYNAMICS
4 BAND EQ
METER
(EQ)
INPUT
DELAY
METER
(Gain Reduction)
Mono in X 16
LEVEL
PAN
PRE/POST
ON
AUX
AUX 6
AUX 7(EFF1)
AUX 8(EFF2)
...
AUX 1
SOLO L
SOLO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
RECORDER MONI 1(...16)
STEREO L
STEREO R
The structure of these channels is the same as that of the input channels, with the
exception that the direct output is fixed at a point immediately before the attenuator.
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
Digital cascade connections
The input signal from the rear panel DIGITAL STEREO IN jack can be cascaded
directly into the stereo bus, instead of being sent via the input patch section and
patched to a pair of input channels. This is convenient when you wish to use an
external digital mixer without linking it to the mixer section of the AW4416. Settings for cascade connection are made in the SET UP screen D.InSetup page.
* For the signal flow diagram, refer to Oscillator, below.
Oscillator
ENABLE
ATT
ON
ATT
AUX 6
AUX 7(EFF1)
AUX 8(EFF2)
...
AUX 1
SOLO L
SOLO R
STEREO L
STEREO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
The AW4416 has a built-in oscillator section that allows you to select a sine wave
(100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz) or white noise. The signal of the oscillator can be output
from one of the following buses: buses 1–8, AUX buses 1–8, or the stereo bus.
Oscillator settings are made in the UTILITY screen Oscillator page.
DIGITAL STEREO L
DIGITAL STEREO R
(BUS CASCADE)
OSC
Stereo output channel
This is the stereo output channel that processes the signals sent from each channel to the stereo bus. It provides the same four-band EQ and dynamics processor
as do the input channels. The output signal of the stereo output channel is sent
via the output patch section to the various output jacks, and is simultaneously
output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack.
When an internal or external CD-RW drive is used to play back an audio CD, the
CD audio signal is patched to a point before the fader of the stereo output channel.
— Operation Guide
27
AUX 6
AUX 7(EFF1)
AUX 8(EFF2)
STEREO
METER
INSERT
METER
ON
LEVEL BAL
DYNAMICS
ATT 4BAND EQ
METER
METER
(EQ)
METER
DYNAMICS
ATT 4BAND EQ
METER METER
(EQ) (Gain Reduction)
OUTPUT PATCH
...
AUX 1
SOLO L
SOLO R
STEREO L
STEREO R
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
CD PLAY mode
CD-RW
DRIVE
L
R
Buses 1–8
The signals sent from each channel to buses 1–8 pass through the master level,
and are sent to the output patch section. The master level is adjusted in the
HOME screen Bus page ([HOME] key → [F3] key).
* For the signal flow diagram, refer to AUX buses 1–8, below.
AUX buses 1–8
The signals sent to AUX buses 1–8 from each channel pass through the master
level, and are sent to the output patch section. The master level is adjusted in the
HOME screen Bus page ([HOME] key → [F3] key).
Tip!
METER
METER
BUS1(...8)
LEVEL
METER
METER
AUX1(...8)
LEVEL
28
— Operation Guide
OUTPUT PATCH
AUX 6
AUX 7(EFF1)
AUX 8(EFF2)
...
AUX 1
SOLO L
SOLO R
STEREO L
STEREO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
When the AW4416 is in its default state, the output of AUX buses 7/8 is sent to the
output patch section, and simultaneously assigned to the inputs of internal effects 1/
2 as well.
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
Output patch
This section assigns the output signals to the STEREO OUT jacks, DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack, I/O cards installed in OPTION I/O slots 1/2, and OMNI OUT
jacks 1–4. The following types of signals can be selected.
❍ STEREO
The stereo bus output signal that has passed through the stereo output channel.
❍ BUS 1–8
The output signals of buses 1–8.
❍ AUX 1–8
The output signals of buses 1–8.
❍ CH DIRECT OUT 1–16
The direct output of input channels 1–16.
❍ INSERT SEND
An insertion output for inserting an external effect into each channel.
❍ RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1–16
The direct output of tracks 1–16 of the recorder section.
STEREO
OUT
DA
L
DA
R
10dBV
2
2
STEREO
8
BUS1~8
8
AUX1~8
16
CH DIRECT OUT1~16
46
INSERT SEND
RECORDER DIRECT 16
OUT 1~16
OUTPUT PATCH
DITHER
DIGITAL
STEREO OUT
METER
OPTION OUT
8
DITHER
SLOT1 OUT
X2
METER
8
DITHER
SLOT2 OUT
METER
OMNI OUT
DA
X4
METER
DA
0dB
Internal effects 1/2
When the AW4416 is in its default state, the output of AUX bus 7/8 is sent to the
output patch section, and simultaneously assigned to the inputs of internal effects
1/2 as well. The outputs of effects 1/2 are respectively assigned to return channels
1/2.
— Operation Guide
29
Chapter1—Welcome to the world of the AW4416
By defeating these assignments, you can insert internal effects 1/2 into any
desired channel, or use AUX bus 7/8 or return channels 1/2 for other purposes.
INSERT SEND
EFFECT
2
46
SELECT
AUX7 (EFF1),
AUX8 (EFF2)
EFFECT
METER
METER
RETURN 1/2
X2
Monitor output/headphone output
As monitoring jacks, the AW4416 provides MONITOR OUT jacks and a
PHONES jack. The types of signal that are output from these jacks will change as
follows, depending on the state of the AW4416.
1 Initial state
The signal of the stereo output channel will be output without change from the
MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.
B When the [SOLO] key is on
The signal of the channel selected by the [ON] key will be sent to the SOLO bus,
and output from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack. At this time, all other
signals will be muted.
C When the TRACK [CUE] key is on
The direct output signal of the track selected by the [REC TRACK SELECT] key will
be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.
D When the internal metronome function is on
The metronome signal will be mixed with the output signals of 1–3.
Tip!
• The same signal is always sent from the MONITOR OUT jacks and the
PHONES jack. However, the level adjustment is independent; the output level
of the MONITOR OUT jacks is adjusted by the [MONITOR OUT] control, and
the output level of the PHONES jack is adjusted by the [PHONES] control.
• Whenever the [SOLO] key and the TRACK [CUE] key are both on, only the
TRACK [CUE] key will be valid.
RECORDER
DIRECT OUT 1
PHONES
PHONES
RECORDER
DIRECT OUT 16
STEREO L
MIXER SOLO
Logic
STEREO R
SOLO L
— Operation Guide
MONITOR
OUT
L
+4dB
R
ON
30
MONITOR
DA
SOLO R
METRONOME
RECORDER
TRACK CUE
Logic
ATT
2
Parts and their functions
This chapter explains the names and functions of the various objects on
the top panel, rear panel, and front panel.
Note
Names of the controllers on the top panel are enclosed in square brackets [ ], in
order to distinguish them from the “software” knobs or buttons displayed in the
display.
Example: [SEL] key, EQ [Q] control
Top panel
Analog input/output section
2
1
LINE
2
PEAK
MIC
LINE
3
PEAK
MIC
LINE
4
PEAK
MIC
LINE
5
PEAK
MIC
LINE
6
PEAK
MIC
LINE
7
PEAK
MIC
8
PEAK
LINE
MIC
LINE
PEAK
MIC
MIN
3
4
PHONES
MONITOR OUT
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
1
LINE
2
PEAK
MIC
LINE
3
PEAK
MIC
LINE
4
PEAK
MIC
LINE
5
PEAK
MIC
LINE
6
PEAK
MIC
LINE
7
PEAK
MIC
LINE
8
PEAK
MIC
LINE
PEAK
MIC
PHONES
MIN
MONITOR OUT
MAX
MIN
MAX
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
1 [GAIN] controls
These controls adjust the input sensitivity of INPUT jacks 1–8. The supported
input level range is –46 dB– +4 dB.
B PEAK indicators
These LEDs will light red when the input signal of INPUT jacks 1–8 reaches a
level 3 dB below the clipping point.
C [PHONES] control
This control adjusts the output level of the signal that is sent from the rear panel
PHONES jack.
— Operation Guide
31
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
D [MONITOR OUT] control
This control adjusts the output level of the signal that is sent from the rear panel
MONITOR OUT jacks.
WORK NAVIGATE section
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
WORK NAVIGATE
SONG
MASTERING
QUICK
REC
CD
PLAY
SHUT DOWN
WORK NAVIGATE
SONG
QUICK
REC
MASTERING
CD
PLAY
2
3
4
SHUT DOWN
1
1 [SONG] key
This key is used for song settings and editing, and to access the SONG screen
where you can perform the shut-down operation.
B [QUICK REC] (quick record) key
At one touch, this key assigns the physical input jacks to the channels of the
mixer section and the tracks of the recorder section, and accesses the QUICK
REC screen in which you can record 16 tracks simultaneously.
C [MASTERING] key
This key accesses the MASTERING screen, where the audio data of the stereo
tracks can be recorded as CD-DA (CD audio) on a CD-R/RW disc inserted in the
CD-R/CD-RW drive (optional).
D [CD PLAY] key
This key accesses the CD PLAY screen, where you can play a music CD or the
audio tracks of a CD-ROM/CD-R inserted in the CD-R/CD-RW drive (optional).
UNIT section
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
UNIT
SETUP
FILE
UTILITY
MIDI
UNIT
SETUP
FILE
UTILITY
MIDI
1
2
3
4
1 [SETUP] key
This key accesses the SETUP screen, where you can make settings such as external input/output patching, word clock, dither, and the solo function.
32
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
B [FILE] key
This key accesses the FILE screen, where you can backup/restore songs and format external storage devices connected to the SCSI connector.
C [UTILITY] key
This key accesses the UTILITY screen, where you can operate the built-in oscillator, and make various system settings.
D [MIDI] key
This key accesses the MIDI screen, where you can make MIDI-related settings.
MIXER section
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
1
2
3
4
DYN
MIXER
VIEW
PAN
EQ
CH VIEW
PAN/ROUTING
EQ/ATT/GRP
DYN
DYN/DLY/
MIXER
VIEW
PAN
EQ
CH VIEW
PAN / ROUTING
EQ/ATT/GRP
DYN/DLY/
1 [VIEW] key
This key accesses the VIEW screen, where you can view all the mix parameters of
the currently selected channel.
B [PAN] key
This key accesses the PAN screen, where you can set the pan and routing of each
channel.
C [EQ] (equalizer) key
This key accesses the EQ/ATT/GRP screen, where you can make equalizer/attenuator settings for the currently selected channel, and make fader group and mute
group settings.
D [DYN] key
This key accesses the DYN/DLY screen, where you can make dynamics processor
and delay settings for the currently selected channel.
— Operation Guide
33
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
FADER MODE section
In this section you can select the items that will be controlled by faders 1–16 of
the top panel.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
FADER MODE
FADER MODE
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
1
2
3
4
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
5
6
7
8
EFF 1
EFF 2
HOME
2
AUX
1
2
AUX
AUX
5
6
AUX
3
AUX
AUX
4
AUX
7
8
EFF 1
EFF 2
HOME
3
1
1 [HOME] key
When this key is on, faders 1–16 will adjust the input levels of the channels
selected in the MIXING LAYER section. The HOME page will appear in the display, showing meters to indicate the input/output levels of each channel.
B [AUX 1]–[AUX 6] keys
When these keys are on, faders 1–16 will adjust the send levels of the signals sent
to AUX 1–6 from the channels selected in the MIXING LAYER section. The AUX
1–AUX 6 pages will appear in the display, allowing you to switch the pre or post
setting for the signals sent from each channel to AUX 1–6.
C [AUX 7]/[AUX 8] keys
When these keys are on, faders 1–16 will adjust the send levels of the signals sent
to internal effects 1/2 from the channels selected in the MIXING LAYER section.
The AUX7/EFF1 screen or AUX8/EFF2 screen will appear in the display, allowing
you to switch the pre or post setting for the signals sent from each channel to
internal effects 1 and 2, and to set the effect parameters.
34
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
MIXING LAYER section
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
1
2
3
MIXING LAYER
1-16
17-24
RTN
MONI
INPUT
INPUT
RECORDER
MIXING LAYER
1-16
17-24
RTN
MONI
INPUT
INPUT
RECORDER
1 [1-16] key
B [17-24] key
C [MONI] key
In this section you can select the mixing layer that will be controlled by the top
panel [SEL] keys 1–16, [ON] keys 1–16 and faders 1–16.
These keys correspond to mixing layers as follows.
1-16
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
RTN
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
2
15
16
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
5
15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
20
30
40
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
Input channels 1–16
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
70
16
STEREO
Stereo output channel
— Operation Guide
35
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
Stereo output channel
17-24
RTN
Effect return channels 1/2
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
RTN
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
2
16
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
5
15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
20
30
40
50
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Input channels 17–24
11
12
13
14
15
70
16
STEREO
No function
The faders will not be operable.
Attempting to move them by force
will cause malfunctions.
MONI
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
RTN
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
2
16
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
5
15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
20
30
40
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monitor channels 1–16
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
70
16
Stereo output channel
The parameters controlled by faders 1–16 will also change depending on the settings of the FADER MODE section.
36
— Operation Guide
STEREO
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
[SEL] keys, [ON] keys, faders
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
1
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
17
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
1
8
+6
9
+6
10
+6
11
+6
12
+6
13
+6
14
+6
SEL
ON
24
7
+6
SEL
ON
23
6
+6
SEL
ON
22
5
+6
SEL
ON
21
4
+6
SEL
ON
20
3
+6
SEL
ON
19
2
+6
SEL
ON
18
1
+6
SEL
ON
RTN
ON
SOLO
2
15
+6
16
0
+6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
30
40
20
50
40
60
2
3
40
60
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
17
18
19
2
1
2
3
16
ON
+6
0
0
0
10
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
+6
+6
+6
0
0
5
+6
SOLO
40
60
2
40
60
3
40
60
4
40
60
5
40
60
6
40
60
7
40
60
8
40
60
9
40
60
10
40
60
11
40
60
12
40
60
13
40
60
14
40
60
15
70
16
STEREO
4
5
15
20
30
40
50
1
2
15
70
16
STEREO
1 [SEL] (select) keys
These keys select the channel to be operated. The [SEL] key of the currently
selected channel will light. When using automix, the [SEL] keys are used to select
the channels that will be recorded.
B [ON] key
These keys turn each channel on/off. The [ON] key will be lit for channels that
are currently on; the [ON] key will be dark for channels that are off (muted).
When the solo function is on, the [ON] keys will function as solo keys.
C Faders
Depending on the settings of the FADER mode section, these moving faders
adjust the input level or send levels to AUX 1–8 for each channel.
• The channels that correspond to the [SEL] keys 1–16, [ON] keys 1–16, and
faders 1–16 will change depending on the setting of the MIXING LAYER section.
• The STEREO [SEL] key, STEREO [ON] key, and STEREO fader always control
the stereo output channel. They are not affected by the MIXING LAYER section.
D [SOLO] key
This key turns the Solo function on/off.
— Operation Guide
37
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
Display section
2
PAN
EQ
HIGH
Q
1
HI-MID
F
LO-MID
LOW
G
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
4
3
SHIFT
5
6
7
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
PAN
EQ
F
HI
HI-MID
G
LO-MID
Q
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
LO
SHIFT
1 Display
This is a 320×240 pixel liquid crystal display with backlight, that displays the values of the mix parameters and the current operating status.
B [PAN] control
This controls the pan of the channel currently selected by the [SEL] key. If the stereo output channel is selected, this controls the L/R channel balance.
C EQ [Q]/EQ [F] (EQ frequency)/EQ [G] (EG gain) controls
These are controls for manually operating the EQ of the channel currently
selected by the [SEL] key. From above, they adjust the Q (steepness), F (center frequency), and G (gain) parameters. Use the 4 EQ [HIGH]–EQ [LOW] keys to
select the band that will be controlled.
D EQ [HIGH]/EQ [HI-MID]/EQ [LO-MID]/EQ [LOW] keys
These keys select the band that will be controlled by the 3 controls.
E [F1]–[F5] (function 1–5) keys
These keys are used to access pages or to execute specific functions, according to
the tabs or buttons shown at the bottom of the display.
38
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
F [SHIFT] key
This key is used to switch the tabs or buttons shown at the bottom of the display.
You can use a variety of additional functions by holding down the [SHIFT] key
and pressing the [F1]–[F5] keys.
Note
symbol is displayed in the lower left of the screen to indicate a page that supports the [SHIFT] key.
G Contrast
This adjusts the contrast of the display.
Level meter/counter section
1
2
4
ABS/REL
3
PEAK HOLD
REC TRACK SELECT
TRACK
5
CUE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ST
6
7
ALL
SAFE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
ABS/REL
PEAK HOLD
REC TRACK SELECT
TRACK
CUE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALL
SAFE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ST
1 Access indicator
This indicator shows that the internal hard disk is being accessed. This indicator
will light red while the hard disk is being read or written.
Note
Turning off the power while the access indicator is lit may not only result in loss
of the data on disk, but may also destroy the disk itself. You must perform the
shut-down process (→ P.17) before turning the power off.
B [ABS/REL] switch
This switches the counter display between absolute time (ABS) or relative time
(REL).
— Operation Guide
39
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
C [PEAK HOLD] switch
This switch sets/defeats the peak hold function of the level meters.
D Level meters/counter
This area displays various information necessary when operating the recorder
section of the AW4416, such as level meters for each track of the recorder section, a time counter, and the number of the currently selected scene memory.
E TRACK [CUE] key
This key is used to output the signal of the desired track directly to the MONITOR
OUT jacks for monitoring. Use the [REC TRACK SELECT] keys to select the track.
F [REC TRACK SELECT] keys
Use these keys to select the track(s) to be recorded. When the TRACK [CUE] key
is on, these keys select the track to be monitored.
G [ALL SAFE] key
This key cancels all record-ready settings of the [REC TRACK SELECT] keys.
RECORDER section
RECORDER
TRACK
EDIT
1
2
UNDO
REDO
3
4
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
RECORDER
TRACK
EDIT
UNDO
REDO
1 [TRACK] key
This key accesses the TRACK screen, where you can view the recorded status of
each track and make virtual track assignments.
B [EDIT] key
This key accesses the EDIT page, where you can edit tracks and virtual tracks.
C [UNDO] key
This key cancels the recording or editing operation that was last executed in the
recorder section, restoring the data to its previous state. By repeatedly pressing
the [UNDO] key, you can return through as many as sixteen previous operations.
D [REDO] key
This key re-executes the recording or editing operation that was cancelled by the
[UNDO] key.
40
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
AUTOMATION section
The keys of this section access screen pages where you can operate the automix
and scene memory functions.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
AUTOMATION
AUTOMATION
AUTO
MIX
SCENE
AUTO
MIX
SCENE
1
2
The following screens correspond to these keys.
1 [AUTOMIX] key
This key accesses the AUTOMIX screen, where you can operate and edit automix.
B [SCENE] key
This key accesses the SCENE screen, where you can perform scene memory operations.
SCENE MEMORY section
In this section you can directly store or recall scene memories.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
SCENE MEMORY
SCENE MEMORY
STORE
RECALL
RECALL
STORE
1
2
3
1 [STORE] key
This key stores the state of the mixer section and input/output patching into the
scene number shown in the display or the level meter/counter.
B [
]/[
] keys
These keys select the scene number for storing or recalling.
C [RECALL] key
This key recalls the scene whose number is shown in the display or in the level
meter/counter.
— Operation Guide
41
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
CURSOR/JOG & SHUTTLE section
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
1
JOG ON
JOG ON
4
CURSOR
ENTER
YES/LOCATE
DATA/
JOG
SHUTTLE
2 3
5
CURSOR
ENTER
LOCATE
DATA/
JOG
SHUTTLE
1 [JOG ON] key
This key turns the “nudge” function on/off for the [DATA/JOG] dial and [SHUTTLE] dial. (“Nudge” is a function that repeatedly plays back a fixed region starting
at the current location, either forward or backward.) When this is turned on, the
key will light.
B [DATA/JOG] dial
The function of this dial will depend on the on/off status of the [JOG ON] key,
and on the on/off status of the [NUM LOCATE] key in the locate section.
❍ When the [JOG ON] key is off
The dial will adjust the value of the parameter currently selected in the display, or
select an item from a list.
❍ When the [JOG ON] key is on
Depending on the direction in which you turn the dial, playback of a fixed region
will occur repeatedly in the forward or reverse direction, allowing you to search
for a desired location.
❍ When the [NUM LOCATE] key is on
The dial will advance the time counter in the display.
C [SHUTTLE] dial
The function of this dial will depend on the on/off status of the [JOG ON] key.
❍ When the [JOG ON] key is on
The current nudge playback region will be moved either forward or backward,
depending on the direction in which you turn the dial.
❍ When the [JOG ON] key is off
Depending on the direction and angle to which you turn the dial, reverse
(review) or fast-forward (cue) playback will occur at a variety of speeds.
D CURSOR [
]/[
]/[ ]/[ ] keys
These keys move the cursor (the blinking box) in the display.
42
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
E [ENTER] key
This key is used to finalize a value, execute a function, or move to the specified
locate point.
Locate section
In this section you can perform locate operations for the recorder.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
1
2
MARK SEARCH
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
3
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
5
LAST REC
4
7
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
6
9
8
0
CANCEL
RTZ
J
K
L
M
1 [NUM LOCATE] (number locate) key
This key is used to specify a locate point as a numerical value. When this key is
lit, you can use the numeric keys or the [DATA/JOG] dial to input a locate position, and press the [ENTER] key to execute the Locate operation.
B MARK SEARCH [
]/[
] keys
These keys are used to move to the nearest pre-specified mark point.
C [MARK] key
When you press this key, the current location will be memorized as a mark point.
D [AUTO PUNCH] key
This key turns the auto punch-in/out function on/off.
E LAST REC[IN]/[OUT] (last record in/out) keys
These keys move to the point at which recording was last begun (the IN point) or
ended (the OUT point).
F [SET] key
This key is used in conjunction with the LAST REC[IN]/[OUT] keys and the [A]/
[B] keys to set the last record in/out points or the A/B points. It is also used in conjunction with the [RTZ] key to set the zero point of relative time (REL).
— Operation Guide
43
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
G [REPEAT] key
When this key is on, the area from the A point → B point will be played repeatedly. To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] key once again, or press the
[STOP] key in the transport section.
H [A]/[B] keys
These keys move to the pre-specified A or B points.
I [ROLL BACK] key
When this key is pressed, you will move backward from the current location by
the length of time specified in the UTILITY screen → Prefer.2 page.
J [
] key
Pressing this key will move to the start point of the song.
K [RTZ] (return to zero) key
Pressing this key will move to the zero location of absolute time (if the counter
indicates ABS) or the zero location of relative time (if the counter indicates REL).
L [
] key
Pressing this key will move to the end point of the song.
M [CANCEL] key
This key is used to discard a numerical value that you input, or to cancel operation of a function.
Transport section
In this section you can operate the transport of the recorder.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
REW
FF
STOP
PLAY
REW
FF
STOP
PLAY
REC
1
2
3
4
5
REC
1 [REW] (rewind) key
This key rewinds the current location. By repeatedly pressing this key, you can
switch between 8x and 16x speeds. To stop rewind, press the [STOP] key or the
[PLAY] key.
B [FF] (fast-forward) key
This key fast-forwards the current location. By repeatedly pressing this key, you
can switch between 8x and 16x speeds. To stop fast-forward, press the [STOP]
key or the [PLAY] key.
44
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
C [STOP] key
This key interrupts playback, recording, rewind, or fast-forward, and stops the
recorder.
D [PLAY] key
If the recorder is stopped, pressing this key will begin playback (if the key is
pressed by itself) or record (if the key is pressed while holding down the [REC]
key). If this key is pressed during rewind or fast-forward, the respective operation
will be interrupted, and normal-speed playback will begin. If this key is pressed
during recording, recording will be interrupted and playback will continue
(punch-out).
E [REC] key
If the recorder is stopped, pressing this key holding down the [PLAY] key will
begin recording. Pressing this key holding down the [PLAY] key during playback
will begin recording from that point (punch-in).
SAMPLING PAD section
In this section you can operate the built-in sampler.
1
A
B
F1
SHIFT
F2
F3
F4
F5
SHIFT
SAMPLING PAD
BANK
1
2
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
EDIT
3
4
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
A
B
SAMPLING PAD
BANK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EDIT
1 A/B bank indicators
These will light to indicate the currently selected bank (A or B) of sampling pads.
B [BANK] pad
This pad selects the pad bank (A or B).
C [EDIT] pad
This pad accesses the SAMP.PAD screen, where you can assign sampled sounds
or tracks to each pad.
D Pads 1–8
These pads play back the sampled sounds that have been assigned to each pad.
— Operation Guide
45
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
Rear panel
5
6
8
HI-Z
7
6
BAL
5
4
3
OMNI OUT
MONITOR OUT
3
INSERT I/O
BAL
2
INSERT I/O
BAL
4
BAL
2
1
1
PHANTOM +48V
ON OFF
STEREO OUT
BAL
BAL
3:COLD
4
3
2
1
UNBAL ( 0dB )
7
8
R
L
R
L
BAL (+4dB)
UNBAL (–10dBV)
9
J
1:GND
2:HOT
HOT COLD
XLR
BAL PHONE
OUT IN
INSERT
K
1 [PHANTOM +48V ON/OFF] switch
This switch supplies +48 V phantom power to the INPUT (XLR) 1/2 jacks.
B INPUT 1/2 (XLR) jacks
These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks. Nominal input level is –46 dB–
+4 dB. Pin connections are as follows.
Male XLR connector
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
C INPUT 1/2 (phone) jacks
These are balanced TRS phone type input jacks. Nominal input level is –46 dB–
+4 dB. Pin connections are as follows.
Tip (hot)
1/4" TRS phone plug
Ring (cold)
Sleeve (ground)
If plugs are inserted into both the XLR jack for INPUT 1/2 and the phone jack, the
phone jack will take priority.
46
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
D INSERT I/O 1/2 jacks
These are TRS phone jacks that allow an external effect etc. to be inserted into the
input signal of INPUT jacks 1/2. Nominal input level is 0 dB. Pin connections are
as follows.
Tip (OUT)
1/4" phone plug
OUT
IN
1/4" TRS phone plug
Sleeve (ground)
To the INSERT I/O jack of the AW4416
To the input jack of
the external processor
Sleeve (ground)
Tip (IN)
1/4" phone plug
To the output jack of
the external processor
Sleeve (ground)
E INPUT 3–8 (phone) jacks
These are balanced TRS phone type input jacks. The specifications are the same
as for 3 INPUT 1/2 (phone) jacks.
F INPUT 8 (HI-Z) jack
This is a high impedance unbalanced phone type input jack. Instruments with a
high output impedance such as passive type electric guitars can be directly connected here. Nominal input level is –46 dB– +4 dB.
If plugs are inserted into both the normal INPUT 8 (BAL) jack and the INPUT 8
(HI-Z) jack, the INPUT 8 (HI-Z) jack will take priority.
G 2.5" HARD DISK DRIVE slot
This slot allows an IDE 2.5 inch hard disk to be installed.
Note
• For the procedure of installing the hard disk, refer to page 2.
• For a list of manufacturers and models of hard disk that are known to work
when installed in the AW4416, please refer to the website
<http://www.aw4416.com>
H OMNI OUT 1–4 jacks
These are unbalanced phone jacks that output the analog signal assigned to
OMNI OUT 1–4 in the SETUP screen → Patch OUT page (→ P.136). Nominal
output level is 0 dB.
I MONITOR OUT jacks
These are balanced TRS phone jacks that output analog monitor signals such as
the stereo bus, internal metronome, solo signal, or direct output from recorder
tracks 1–16. Nominal output level is +4 dB.
J STEREO OUT jacks
These are unbalanced RCA phono jacks that output the analog signal assigned to
ST OUT in the SETUP screen → Patch OUT page (→ P.136). Nominal output level
is –10 dBV.
— Operation Guide
47
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
K OPTION I/O slots 1/2
These slots allow optional I/O cards to be installed. Assignments for the signals
input or output via the I/O cards are made in the SETUP screen → Patch IN page
(→ P.133), and in the SETUP screen → Patch OUT page (→ P.136).
Note
For details on installing an I/O card, refer to page 14.
R
Q
P
TO HOST
SCSI
WORD CLOCK
OUT
IN
MIDI
MTC OUT
POWER
ON/ OFF
Z
S
OUT/ THRU
O
N
M
DIGITAL STEREO
OUT
IN
L
PHONES
MOUSE
FOOT SW
X
Y
IN
AC INLET
T
U V W
L PHONES jack
This is a stereo headphone jack that allows a set of stereo headphones to be connected. This jack will always output the same signal as the MONITOR OUT jacks.
M DIGITAL STEREO IN jack
This is a coaxial jack that digitally inputs a stereo signal. It is compatible with the
IEC958 consumer format. The channel to which this signal will be input is
assigned in the SETUP screen → Patch IN page (→ P.133).
N DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
This is a coaxial jack that digitally outputs the stereo signal assigned to D.ST OUT
in the SETUP screen → Patch OUT page (→ P.136). It is compatible with the
IEC958 consumer format.
O WORD CLOCK IN jack
P WORD CLOCK OUT jack
These are BNC type jacks for input/output of a word clock signal. They are used
to synchronize the digital audio signal processing with an external device.
Q SCSI connector
This is a D-sub half-pitch 50 pin SCSI connector that is compatible with the SCSI2 standard. SCSI-2 compatible storage devices can be connected for data backup.
48
— Operation Guide
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
• To connect the AW4416 to an external device, use only high-impedance SCSI
cables shorter than 1 meter and with an impedance of 100 ohms (±10 ohms).
• Storage devices connected to the SCSI connector are used for data backup.
They cannot be used directly for recording or playback.
• The only types of SCSI-2 storage devices that can be connected are MO, HD,
and CD-R/W drives. For a list of manufacturers and models of storage device
that are known to work with the AW4416, please refer to the website
<http://www.aw4416.com>
R TO HOST connector
This is an 8-pin mini-DIN connector that can be connected directly to the serial
port of a PC or Macintosh, allowing MIDI applications programs to be used.
S POWER switch
This switch turns the power on/off.
T AC INLET connector
Connect the included power supply cable here to supply power to the unit.
Use only the included power supply cable.
U MTC OUT connector
These connectors are used to send and receive MIDI messages to and from external MIDI devices. The MIDI IN connector receives messages. The MIDI OUT/
THRU jack can function either as a MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU connector,
depending on the setting of the MIDI screen → MIDI Setup page MIDI OUT
SELECT. parameter. The MTC OUT connector is an output connector dedicated to
MTC (MIDI Time Code) messages.
V MIDI OUT/THRU connector
W MIDI IN connector
X MOUSE connector
This is a D-sub 9-pin (male) connector for connecting a serial mouse. By using
this connector, you can use a mouse to select parameters within the display or to
change pages.
Y FOOT SW jack
An optional foot switch (Yamaha FC5) can be connected to this jack, and used to
play/stop the transport, or to manually punch-in/out.
If a foot switch of the wrong format is connected, the unit may not operate correctly.
Z Grounding connector
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, connect this to a grounding connection
(earth) before you connect the power cable. This unit comes with a three-conductor power cable. In this case, the same result will be obtained if the ground pin of
the electrical outlet is connected to ground. This will also reduce hum and noise.
— Operation Guide
49
Chapter2—Parts and their functions
Front panel
1
1 CD-RW drive cover
This covers the CD-RW drive (option) installation bay.
Note
For details on installing a CD-RW drive, refer to page 5.
50
— Operation Guide
3
The user interface of
the AW4416
This chapter explains the various parts of the AW4416’s user interface, and
basic operation of the AW4416.
Display
The display in the top panel shows the following information.
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
1 Screen name
This is the name of the currently selected screen.
B Page name/channel
The information shown here will depend on the screen. It will show either the
name of the page selected within the screen, or the channel that is selected for
operation.
C Song name
This is the name of the currently selected song.
D Current location
This shows the current time location of the song, and the remaining available
recording time. The units of the current location can be selected from the following. (Refer to Reference Guide “SONG screen/Setting page.”)
• Time display (SECOND) ............... Hours:minutes:seconds:milliseconds
• Time code display (TIME CODE) .. Hours:minutes:seconds:frames:sub-frames
• Measure display (MEASURE) ........ Measures/beats/ticks (1/960th of a quarter
note)
— Operation Guide
51
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
The remaining recording time will be displayed in the TRACK screen TR View
page when you press the [SHIFT] + [F1] key.
E Song/scene information
The information shown in this location will depend on the screen: the sampling
frequency, quantization, and tempo/meter of the currently selected song, or the
number and name of the currently selected scene.
F M (menu) button
This button selects the display access menu. The display access menu lets you
switch screens using the mouse instead of the keys of the top panel (→ P.56).
G Main screen
The information shown here will depend on the key that was pressed last. The following user interface components are used in the main screen.
❍ Cursor
The blinking rectangular frame in the display is
called the “cursor.” When the cursor surrounds an
on-screen item, that item is selected for operation.
Cursor
❍ Pointer
If a serial mouse is connected to the MOUSE connector on the rear panel, a black arrow will
appear in the display. This arrow is called the
“pointer.” The pointer is used to select the item
that will be manipulated by the mouse.
Pointer
The action of moving the pointer to the desired item pressing the left button or
right button of the mouse is called “clicking.”
Clicking
Tip!
When clicking the mouse to adjust a parameter value, the value will increase by
one each time you click the right button, and decrease by one each time you click
the left button.
52
— Operation Guide
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
The action of moving the pointer to the desired item, then pressing and holding
the left button or right button of the mouse and moving the mouse is called “dragging.”
Dragging
Tip!
When dragging the mouse to continuously adjust a parameter value, the value will
change more rapidly if you hold down the right button while dragging. The value
will change at the usual rate if you hold down the left button while dragging.
❍ Buttons
Buttons in the display are used to turn parameters on/off, or to select one of multiple possibilities. Buttons that are currently on are displayed as white text on a
black background, and buttons that are currently off are displayed as black text
on a white background.
Off
On
< Buttons >
❍ Knobs/faders/numerical boxes
Knobs/faders/numerical boxes in the display are used to modify the value of the
corresponding parameter. The value of a knob or fader is displayed below or at
the right.
< Knob >
< Fader >
< Numerical box >
❍ Tab
If a screen includes multiple pages, the name of each page will be shown at the
bottom of the display. The areas where these names appear are called “tabs.” Tabs
are used to switch pages within a screen.
< Tabs >
In some screens, you can access additional items or buttons in this area. Such
screens are indicated by a
symbol in the lower left of the display.
<
symbol indicating that there are additional tabs or buttons >
— Operation Guide
53
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
Level meters/counter
The level meters/counter in the upper right of the top panel show the following
information.
21
3
H
4
M
S
F
ms
REMAIN
ABS
REL
K
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
5
6
MTC
SCENE
MASTER
SLAVE
E
–dB 0
–dB 0
FINE 2
FINE 2
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
1
2
9J
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
READY
INPUT
L
R
K 8
1 REMAIN indicator
This will light when the counter 3 shows the remaining recording time. In the
TRACK screen TR View page, this will appear when you press [SHIFT] + [F1].
B ABS/REL indicator
One of these indicators will light when the time/timecode shown in the counter
3 is either absolute time (ABS) or relative time (REL). To switch between absolute
time and relative time, use the ABS/REL switch located at the right of the level
meter/counter.
C Counter
This is the current time in the song. You can select from the following units for
display (Refer to Reference Guide “SONG screen/Setting page”).
• Time display (SECOND) ............... Hours:minutes:seconds:milliseconds
• Time code display (TIME CODE) .. Hours:minutes:seconds:frames:sub-frames
• Measure display (MEASURE) ........ Measures/beats/ticks (1/960th of a quarter
note)
D Word clock
This shows the source (INT=internal clock or EXT=external clock) of the clock
according to which the AW4416 is operating, and the frequency (44.1 k or 48 k).
This will indicate “LOCK” if the AW4416 is locked to the clock source, and
“VARI” if the vari-pitch function (Refer to Reference Guide “SET UP screen/D.in
Setup page”) is enabled.
E MTC
This shows the status of MTC synchronization. If the AW4416 is following MTC
messages from an external device, this will indicate “SLAVE.” It the AW4416 is
transmitting MTC to an external device, this will indicate “MASTER”
F Scene
This is the number of the currently selected scene (the current scene). When the
mix parameters of the last stored or recalled scene are modified, an “E” (edited)
character will be displayed at the lower right.
54
— Operation Guide
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
G Level meters 1–16
These level meters show the input level and output level for each track 1–16 of
the recorder section.
H Level meter L/R
These level meters show the output level (the signal after passing through EQ and
dynamics processing) of the stereo output channel.
I REC READY indicator
This indicator will light red for tracks that are in record-ready mode.
J INPUT MONITOR indicator
This indicator will light white for tracks whose input is being monitored.
K Level display
The range of the display can be switched between two ranges: 0 to –60 dB (normal) and 0 to –26 dB (fine).
— Operation Guide
55
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
Basic operation of the AW4416
This section explains basic operation of the AW4416.
Accessing a screen/page
To operate the mix parameters of the AW4416 or to edit the internal settings, you
must first access the desired screen in the display. If a screen contains two or
more pages, you must then select the desired page.
❒ Using the controls of the top panel
1. Press the key for the desired screen.
The keys of the WORK NAVIGATE, UNIT, MIXER, FADER MODE, RECORDER,
and AUTOMATION sections of the top panel, and the [EDIT] key of the sample
pad section each correspond to their own screens, which you can access by
pressing the appropriate key.
Tip!
If a screen contains multiple pages, the most recently operated page will appear.
2. To switch pages within a screen, press the function key ([F1]–[F5] keys)
that corresponds to the tab for the desired page.
Each tab corresponds to the following function key.
[F1 key]
[F2 key]
[F3 key]
[F4 key]
[F5 key]
Tip!
By repeatedly pressing the same key you pressed in step 1, you can cycle through
the pages of the screen.
❒ Using the mouse
1. Click the M (menu) button in the upper right of the screen.
The display access menu will appear. From this menu you can use the mouse to
select screens.
56
— Operation Guide
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
2. In the display access menu, click the button that corresponds to the
desired screen.
3. To changes pages within the same screen, move the pointer to one of
the tabs in the bottom of the screen, and click the left or right mouse
button.
The corresponding page will appear.
< Click a tab >
Turning a button on/off
Here’s how a button displayed in the screen can be turned on/off.
❒ Using the controls of the top panel
1. Use the CURSOR [
desired button.
]/[
]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the
< Move the cursor >
2. Press the [ENTER] key.
The button will be turned on or off.
< Switch on/off >
❒ Using the mouse
1. Move the pointer to the desired button.
< Move the pointer >
2. Click the left or right button of the mouse.
< Switch on/off >
— Operation Guide
57
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
Editing the value of a fader/knob/numerical
box
Here’s how to edit the value of an on-screen fader/knob/numerical box.
❒ Using the controls of the top panel
1. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the
desired fader/knob numerical box.
< Move the cursor >
2. Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value.
< Edit the value >
❒ Using the mouse
1. Move the pointer to the desired fader/knob/numerical box, and click the
left or right mouse button.
The cursor will change to a
shape.
< Click the fader/knob/numerical box >
Tip!
The amount by which the value changes will differ depending on whether you
clicked the left or right mouse button. If you wish to change the value in large steps,
click the right button. If you wish to change the value in fine steps, click the left
mouse button.
2. Continue to hold down the mouse button, and drag the mouse up or down.
The value will increase or decrease depending on the direction in which you drag
the mouse.
< Drag the fader/knob/numerical box up or down >
58
— Operation Guide
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
Using the additional function buttons
In screens where the
symbol is displayed in the lower left, you can access
additional buttons or tabs in the bottom of the display to use various additional
functions.
❒ Using the controls of the top panel
1. In a screen where the
[SHIFT] key.
symbol is displayed in the lower left, press the
While you continue holding the [SHIFT] key, buttons for the additional functions
will appear in the tab area at the bottom of the display.
< Additional function buttons >
2. Continue to hold down the [SHIFT] key, and press the function key
([F1]–[F5]) that corresponds to the desired button.
The function assigned to the corresponding button will be executed.
❒ Using the mouse
1. In a screen where the
symbol is displayed, click the
symbol.
Buttons for the additional functions will appear in the tab area at the bottom of
the display.
< Additional function buttons >
Tip!
When using the mouse, the additional function buttons will continue to be displayed even after you take your finger off of the mouse button.
2. Directly click one of the additional function buttons.
The function assigned to the corresponding button will be executed.
— Operation Guide
59
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
Inputting text
When you create a new song, or when you save the settings of a scene memory
or library, a popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the
song or the settings. Here’s how to input text into the popup window.
❒ Using the controls of the tab page
1. Perform the scene or library Save operation, or create a new song.
If you perform the scene or library Save operation, a TITLE EDIT popup window
will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the scene or library.
If you create a new song, a NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you
to assign a name to the song. Then a COMMENT EDIT popup window will
appear, allowing you to add a comment to the song.
2
3
1
4
< TITLE EDIT popup window >
2
3
1
4
< NAME EDIT popup window >
2
3
1
4
< COMMENT EDIT popup window >
60
— Operation Guide
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
The items in each popup window and their function are as follows.
1 Text input box
Characters, numerals, and symbols can be input in this box. When you create a
new song or save for the first time, a default name will be input. The highlighted
text indicates that it is being changed.
Tip!
Scene and library names can be up to 16 characters long. Song names and song
comments can be up to 64 characters long.
B CANCEL button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the procedure
will be cancelled and you will return to the previous screen.
C OK button
If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the text you
entered will be finalized. (If you are creating a new song, you will proceed to the
next step of the procedure.)
D Text palette
Here you can select the character to input in the text input box. The following
characters, symbols, and numerals can be used.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R ST UVW XY Z
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
spc (space) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 , . ! " # & / * - + < > : ;
2. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor in the text
palette to the button for the desired character, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The corresponding character/symbol/numeral will be input into the text input
box, and the highlighted area will move to the right.
Tip!
If you wish to correct a character that was input by mistake, you can use the [DATA/
JOG] dial to move the highlighted area to left or right.
3. Input the remaining characters in the same way.
While inputting text, you can use the following buttons in the text palette.
button........... Insert a space (blank) at the highlighted area. Subsequent
characters will be moved backward.
button........... Delete the character at the highlighted area. Subsequent
characters will be moved forward.
/
buttons ........ Move the highlighted area to left or right.
/
buttons
(NAME EDIT, COMMENT EDIT windows only)......Move the highlighted area
upward or downward.
button .. Switch between uppercase alphabet + numerals and lowercase alphabet + symbols. When this button is on, you can
input uppercase alphabetical characters and numerals.
4. When you have finished inputting the desired text, move the cursor to
the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
61
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
❒ Using the mouse
1. Perform the scene or library Save operation, or create a new song.
If you perform the scene or library Save operation, a TITLE EDIT popup window
will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the scene or library.
If you create a new song, a NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you
to assign a name to the song. Then a COMMENT EDIT popup window will
appear, allowing you to add a comment to the song.
2. In the text palette, click the mouse on the button for the character that
you wish to input.
The corresponding character/symbol/numeral will be input into the text input
box, and the highlighted area will move to the right.
< Click a character button >
Tip!
If you wish to correct a character that you input by mistake, click the incorrect character to move the highlighted area to that location.
3. Input the remaining characters in the same way.
Tip!
When using the mouse, you can use the
button,
/ (NAME EDIT/COMMENT EDIT windows only), or
clicking the corresponding button in the text palette.
button,
/ buttons,
button by
4. When you have finished inputting the desired text, move the cursor to
the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.
62
— Operation Guide
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
Selecting channels
When editing the channel mix parameters on the AW4416, you must first select
the channel that you wish to control. Here’s how to select channels.
1. Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section to select the mixing layer that
you wish to control
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
MIXING LAYER
MIXING LAYER
1-16
17-24
RTN
MONI
INPUT
INPUT
RECORDER
1-16
17-24
RTN
MONI
INPUT
INPUT
RECORDER
According to the selected key of the MIXING LAYER section, the channels controlled by the [SEL] keys, [ON] keys, and faders of the top panel will change as
follows.
1–8
9–14
[1-16]
15/16
STEREO
Effect return
1/2
Stereo output
channel
Input channels 1–16
Input channels 17–24
[17-24 RTN]
[MONI]
—
Monitor channels 1–16
2. Press the [SEL] key of the channel you wish to control.
The [SEL] key of the corresponding channel will light.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
17
SEL
ON
18
1
SEL
ON
19
2
SEL
ON
20
3
SEL
ON
21
4
SEL
ON
22
5
SEL
ON
23
6
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
SEL
ON
1
8
9
10
11
12
13
SEL
ON
24
7
14
SEL
ON
RTN
ON
SOLO
2
15
16
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
+6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
10
15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
30
40
50
40
60
40
60
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
17
18
19
2
1
2
3
16
ON
+6
0
0
0
10
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
40
60
+6
+6
+6
0
0
5
+6
40
60
2
40
60
3
40
60
4
40
60
5
40
60
6
40
60
7
40
60
8
40
60
9
40
60
10
40
60
11
40
60
12
40
60
13
40
60
14
40
60
15
70
16
STEREO
SOLO
5
15
20
30
40
50
1
2
15
70
16
STEREO
— Operation Guide
63
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
3. Use the [PAN] control, EQ [Q]/[F]/[G] controls, and EQ [HIGH]–
EQ[LOW] keys at the right of the display to adjust the pan and EQ of the
channel that you selected by pressing its [SEL] key.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
PAN
EQ
F
HI
HI-MID
G
LO-MID
Q
LO
PAN
EQ
Q
HIGH
HI-MID
F
LO-MID
G
LOW
The controls and keys at the right of the display apply only to the channel that
was last-selected by its [SEL] key.
Tip!
If the VIEW, PAN, EQ, or DYN screens are shown in the display, you can control the
parameters of the channel selected by its [SEL] key.
4. To operate the faders, use the [HOME] key or [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] keys of
the FADER MODE section to select the fader mode (the parameters that
will be controlled by the faders).
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
FADER MODE
FADER MODE
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
1
2
3
4
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
5
6
7
8
EFF 1
EFF 2
AUX
1
2
AUX
AUX
5
6
AUX
3
AUX
AUX
4
AUX
7
8
EFF 1
EFF 2
HOME
HOME
The table on the following page shows the parameters controlled by each fader
will change.
64
— Operation Guide
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
❍ If the mixing layer is [1-16]
Fader
Fader mode
1–8
9–14
15
16
HOME
Input level of input channels 1–16
AUX1
Send level from input channels 1–16 to AUX 1
AUX2
Send level from input channels 1–16 to AUX 2
AUX3
Send level from input channels 1–16 to AUX 3
AUX4
Send level from input channels 1–16 to AUX 4
AUX5
Send level from input channels 1–16 to AUX 5
AUX6
Send level from input channels 1–16 to AUX 6
AUX7
Send level from input channels 1–16 to effect 1
AUX8
Send level from input channels 1–16 to effect 2
STEREO
Output level of the
stereo output
channel
❍ If the mixing layer is [17-24 RTN]
Fader
Fader mode
1–8
9–14
15
16
STEREO
HOME
Input level of
input channels
17–24
Input level of
effect return 1
Input level of
effect return 2
AUX1
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to AUX 1
Send level from
effect return 1 to
AUX 1
Send level from
effect return 2 to
AUX 1
AUX2
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to AUX 2
Send level from
effect return 1 to
AUX 2
Send level from
effect return 2 to
AUX 2
AUX3
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to AUX 3
Send level from
effect return 1 to
AUX 3
Send level from
effect return 2 to
AUX 3
AUX4
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to AUX 4
Send level from
effect return 1 to
AUX 4
Send level from Output level of the
stereo output
effect return 2 to
channel
AUX 4
AUX5
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to AUX 5
Send level from
effect return 1 to
AUX 5
Send level from
effect return 2 to
AUX 5
AUX6
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to AUX 6
Send level from
effect return 1 to
AUX 6
Send level from
effect return 2 to
AUX 6
AUX7
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to effect 1
—
Send level from
effect return 2 to
effect 1
AUX8
Send level from
input channels
17–24 to effect 2
Send level from
effect return 1 to
effect 2
—
—
— Operation Guide
65
Chapter3—The user interface of the AW4416
❍ If the mixing layer is [MONI]
Fader
Fader mode
1–8
66
9–14
15
16
HOME
Input level of monitor channels 1–16
AUX1
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to AUX 1
AUX2
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to AUX 2
AUX3
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to AUX 3
AUX4
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to AUX 4
AUX5
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to AUX 5
AUX6
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to AUX 6
AUX7
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to effect 1
AUX8
Send level from monitor channels 1–16 to effect 2
— Operation Guide
STEREO
Output level of the
stereo output
channel
4
Connections and setup
This chapter explains how to connect external devices and set up your system before you begin using the AW4416.
Connections
The following diagram shows typical audio connections for the AW4416.
Monitor system
VOL
VOL
Headphones
MONITOR OUT
PHONES
OMNI OUT 1/2
I/O card
Digital MTR
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
Effect processor
OPTION
SLOT 1
88
OPTION
SLOT 2
INPUT 1–8
DAT recorder
AW4416
STEREO DIGITAL IN
00.00.00.00
DAT
STEREO DIGITAL OUT
INSERT I/O
GAIN
REDUCTION
0
SIGNAL PEAK
EXP GATE THRESHOLD
RATIO
4
–4
ATTACK
3
0
10
0
10
0.3
10
1
1
00
RELEASE
5
20
–16
–24
COMP/LIMITER
8
2
–8
COMP
GC2020C
0.2
0.1
ms
20
0.05
sec
INPUT
GAIN
REDUCTION
0
–4
–8
OUTPUT
0.5
1
2
0
10
0
10
LINK
CHANNEL A
COMP
SIGNAL PEAK
EXP GATE THRESHOLD
–24
RATIO
4
ATTACK
8
3
0
10
0
10
0.3
00
0.2
0.1
ms
CHANNEL B
20
0.05
INPUT
INPUT 8
Hi-Z
POWER
OUTPUT
0.5
1
10
1
1
RELEASE
5
20
2
–16
INPUT 1–8
sec
2
0
10
0
10
ON
OFF
Signal processor
Electric guitar/
Electric bass
Rhythm machine
Synthesizer
— Operation Guide
67
Chapter4—Connections and setup
Word clock settings
If a device such as a digital MTR or DAT recorder is digitally connected to the
AW4416, the clock that controls the timing at which digital audio is processed
(referred to as the “word clock”) must be synchronized. To do so, you must select
one of the devices as the word clock master, and set the remaining devices so
that they will follow the word clock supplied from the master device. Here we
will explain how to select the clock source to which the AW4416 will synchronize.
Be aware that if the system includes an unsynchronized device, drop-outs and
click noise will occur.
1. Turn on the power of the external digital device and of the AW4416.
If an external device is connected to the SCSI connector of the AW4416, you
must turn on the power in the order of external SCSI device → AW4416. If the
power of the external SCSI device is off when you turn on the AW4416, it may
not start up correctly.
If the D.in Setup tab is not assigned to the [F4] key when you press the [SETUP]
key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key to switch the tab, and then press the [F4]
key.
2. 2. Press the [SETUP] key → [F4] key.
The SETUP UP screen D.in Setup page will appear, allowing you to make word
clock settings.
In the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area of this screen you can select one of the following as the clock source to which the AW4416 will synchronize.
❍ SLOT 1 1/2–7/8
❍ SLOT 2 1/2–7/8
An input signal from a digital I/O card installed in OPTION I/O slot 1/2 will be
the clock source. You can select one pair from input channels 1/2–7/8 of the digital I/O card, and the AW4416 will synchronize to the word clock data included
in the input signal of the corresponding channel.
68
— Operation Guide
Chapter4—Connections and setup
❍ D.ST IN
The word clock data included in the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN
jack will be the clock source.
❍ WCLK IN
The word clock data included in the input signal from the WORD CLOCK IN jack
will be the clock source.
❍ INT
The internal clock of the AW4416 will be the clock source.
The currently highlighted button is selected as the word clock source.
Buttons marked with an × symbol indicate that no digital audio signal is
being input from the corresponding slot/jack.
Buttons marked with a / symbol indicate that either no digital audio signal is being input from the corresponding slot/jack, or that it is not synchronized with the AW4416’s internal clock.
Buttons without an × or / symbol indicate that a digital audio signal is
being input from the corresponding slot/jack, and that it is synchronized
with the AW4416’s internal clock.
If the AW4416 is set to be an MTC slave, it is not possible for the AW4416 to
simultaneously be set as the word clock slave.
3. Select the desired clock source in the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area by
using the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the
corresponding button.
The clock source you should select will depend on the system in which you are
using the AW4416. Here we will explain some typical situations.
❍ Using the AW4416 as the word clock master
If no external digital device is connected to the AW4416, or if you wish to use the
AW4416 as the word clock master so that external devices such as a digital MTR
will follow it, turn on the INT button of the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area.
Word clock
Sync Out
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
OPTION
SLOT 1
Word
clock
Sync In
AW4416
(word clock master)
WORD CLOCK SOURCE= INT
Digital MTR
(word clock slave)
OPTION
SLOT 2
Digital MTR
(word clock slave)
• Set the digital MTR so that it will synchronize to the word clock included in
the input signal from the AW4416.
• If you are using two digital MTR units, connect the Sync Out jack of the first
to the Sync In jack of the second as shown here, so that the second digital
MTR will follow the first.
— Operation Guide
69
Chapter4—Connections and setup
❍ Using a digital MTR as the word clock master (1)
This method uses a digital MTR as the word clock master, and causes the
AW4416 to synchronize to the word clock included in the input signal from the
digital I/O card. For this method, turn on one of the 1/2–7/8 buttons for the slot to
which that digital MTR is connected.
Sync Out
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
OPTION
SLOT 1
Word clock
Digital MTR
(word clock master)
Sync In
AW4416
(word clock slave)
WORD CLOCK SOURCE= SLOT 1 1/2–7/8
Word
clock
OPTION
SLOT 2
Digital MTR
(word clock slave)
• Set the digital MTR so that it will operate according to its own internal clock.
• If you are using two digital MTR units, connect the Sync Out jack of the first
to the Sync In jack of the second as shown here, so that the second digital
MTR will follow the first.
❍ Using a digital MTR as the word clock master (2)
This method uses a digital MTR as the word clock master, and causes the
AW4416 to synchronize to the word clock supplied from the word clock output
jack of the digital MTR to the WORD CLOCK IN jack of the AW4416. For this
method, turn on the WCLK IN button.
Word clock
Word Clock In
Word Clock Out
Sync Out
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
OPTION
SLOT 1
Word
clock
Sync In
AW4416
(word clock slave)
WORD CLOCK SOURCE= WCLK IN
Digital MTR
(word clock master)
OPTION
SLOT 2
Digital MTR
(word clock slave)
• Set the digital MTR so that it will operate according to its own internal clock.
• If you are using two digital MTR units, connect the Sync Out jack of the first
to the Sync In jack of the second as shown here, so that the second digital
MTR will follow the first.
70
— Operation Guide
Chapter4—Connections and setup
❍ Using a DAT recorder as the word clock master
If you wish to input a digital signal from a DAT recorder or sampler etc. into the
AW4416 via the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack, turn on the D.ST IN button.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
DAT recorder
(word clock master)
AW4416
(word clock slave)
DIGITAL STEREO OUT
00.00.00.00
DAT
DIGITAL STEREO IN
WORD CLOCK SOURCE= D.ST IN
• Set the DAT recorder so that it will operate according to its own internal
clock.
Most consumer DAT recorders are designed to forcibly follow the word clock of
the input signal when recording. This type of DAT recorder can be used as the
word clock master only when it is playing back.
4. After selecting the desired button, press the [ENTER] key.
The AW4416 will switch to the specified clock source.
• A slight interval of time is required for the AW4416 to select clock sources,
and the sound may be muted during this time.
• After switching the clock source, verify that the button you selected in step 3 is
not marked with an X symbol or / symbol. If an X symbol or / symbol appears
on the button, or if an error message is displayed, check the connections or the
clock setting of the external device.
— Operation Guide
71
5
Recording on the
AW4416
This chapter explains basic operation for performing multitrack recording
and mixdown on the AW4416, using the example of recording instruments
such as rhythm machine (drums), bass, guitar, and keyboard on their own
tracks.
Preparations for recording
Connections and start-up
Here’s how to connect your instruments and monitor system, and start up the
AW4416.
1. Connect your instruments, mics, and monitor system to the AW4416 as
shown in the following diagram.
Synthesizer
Mics for
recording drums
Electric guitar/
Electric bass
Headphones
INPUT 1
2
3–8
Rhythm machine
INPUT 8
(HI-Z)
PHONES
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
AW4416
VOL
VOL
Monitor
system
MONITOR OUT
Connect mics, synthesizers or rhythm machines, direct boxes, or guitar/bass
preamps to the INPUT 1/2 (XLR) jacks or INPUT 1–8 (phone) jacks, according to
the type of their output connector.
When directly connecting instruments with a high output impedance, such as
passive type electric guitars or electric basses, connect them to the INPUT 8 (HIZ) jack.
— Operation Guide
73
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
2. Turn on the power in the following order: audio sources/SCSI devices
connected to the AW4416 → the AW4416 → monitor system.
The display of the AW4416 will show the opening screen, and will then change
to the TRACK screen TR View page.
When the power of the AW4416 is turned on, the song you were last operating
will be loaded automatically.
• If the internal hard disk of the AW4416 has not been formatted, a message of
“Format OK? [Y (Enter)/N (Any)]” will appear instead of the above screen when
the power is turned on.
• If a SCSI device is connected to the AW4416, and you turn on the power of the
AW4416 when the SCSI device is turned off, it may not start up correctly. If the
SCSI device is turned on after the AW4416 is turned on, it will not function
correctly.
74
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Creating a new song
On the AW4416, all data (mixer settings, recorder settings, audio data etc.) necessary for reproducing a musical work are stored on the hard disk as a unit called
a “song.” In order to record, you must begin by creating a new song.
Tip!
A new 44.1 kHz/16 bit song is created when the internal hard disk is formatted, and
will automatically be loaded the next time you turn on the power of the AW4416. If
you wish to use this song, the following procedure is not necessary.
1. Press the [SONG] key → [F1] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear. In this page you can create a new
song, and save/load existing songs.
2. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the NEW
SONG button in the lower right of the screen, and press the [ENTER]
key.
A popup window will appear, asking you whether you wish to save the song you
are now working on (referred to as the “current song”).
— Operation Guide
75
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
3. Move the cursor to the YES button to save the current song, or to the
NO button if you do not wish to save it. Then press the [ENTER] key.
The NEW SONG SETTING popup window will appear. In this popup window
you can specify the basic settings for the new song.
❍ Fs
This is the sampling frequency at which the input signals are converted into digital form. Move the cursor to either the 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz button, and press the
[ENTER] key to make your selection.
❍ Recbit
This is the number of quantization bits for the audio data recorded on the hard
disk. Move the cursor to either 16 BIT or 24 BIT, and press the [ENTER] key to
make your selection.
• It is not possible to change the sampling frequency or quantization after creating a song.
• The number of tracks that can be simultaneously played or recorded will
depend on the specified quantization.
• If you intend to use a CD-RW drive to create an audio CD of your song when it
is completed, you must select 44.1 kHz as the sampling frequency. A song
with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz cannot be recorded on an audio CD.
4. After you have selected the sampling frequency and the quantization,
move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The new
song will be created.
If you selected 48 kHz as the sampling frequency, the display will indicate “Not
for Audio CD -48 kHz- ARE YOU SURE?”, warning you that an audio CD cannot
be produced from this song. Move the cursor to either the OK button or the CANCEL button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The MIXER DATA IMPORT popup window will appear. This popup window
allows you to import mixer data from an existing song. For this example, it is not
necessary to make any settings.
76
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Tip!
Mixer data import, name edit, and comment edit operations can also be performed
later in the SONG screen Song Edit page or SONG screen Setting page, as an alternative to performing them here when you create a new song.
5. Make sure that the cursor is located at the OK button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to
the song.
6. Use the character palette to assign a song name of up to 64 characters.
(For details on inputting characters, refer to page 60.) When you have
finished inputting the song name, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The COMMENT EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a comment to the song.
7. As desired, input a comment in the same way as the song name. Then
move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
77
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Recording the first tracks
This section explains the procedure for recording a rhythm machine (or drum
mics) connected to INPUT jacks 1/2 onto tracks 1/2 of the recorder.
The explanation in this section assumes that the AW4416’s mixer and patching
settings are in their initial state. If you have already modified the mixer parameters or the input/output patching, please recall the default scene (scene number
00) from the scene memory (→ P.206).
Set the input level
1. While producing sound on your instrument, adjust [GAIN] controls 1/2
so that the PEAK indicators of INPUT jacks 1/2 light briefly when the
loudest sounds are played.
1
LINE
2
PEAK
MIC
LINE
PEAK
MIC
Tip!
The [GAIN] control adjusts the sensitivity of the analog input. In order to record the
sound cleanly and with the widest possible range, you should adjust the [GAIN] as
high as possible without allowing clipping to occur.
2. Press the [HOME] key → [F1] key
The HOME screen 1–24/Rtn page will appear. This page shows the input levels of
input channels 1–24 and return channels 1/2.
3. In the MIXING LAYER section, press the [1–16] key to select input channels 1–16 as the mixing layer.
78
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
When you switch mixing layers, the faders will move instantly to new positions.
Be careful not to place objects near the faders.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
MIXING LAYER
MIXING LAYER
1-16
17-24
RTN
MONI
INPUT
INPUT
RECORDER
1-16
17-24
RTN
MONI
INPUT
INPUT
RECORDER
The “mixing layer” is the group of channels controlled by the top panel [ON]
keys 1–16, [SEL] keys 1–16, and faders 1–16. The AW4416 has the following
three mixing layers:
1 Input channels 1–16
B Input channels 17–24 + return channels
C Monitor channels
Even when you switch to a different mixing layer, the fader locations and [ON]
key settings of the previous mixing layer are remembered, and will return when
that mixing layer is selected once again.
4. Make sure that [ON] keys 1/2 are turned on, and raise faders 1/2 to the
0 dB position.
5. While playing your instrument, watch the level meters displayed in the
screen and adjust the input level of inputs 1/2.
When the AW4416 is in the initial state, the input jacks are patched to input
channels as follows. As you can see from this diagram, the rhythm machine (or
drum mics) connected to INPUT jacks 1/2 are patched to input channels 1/2.
Input
patch
×8
INPUT jacks 1–8
I/O card
I/O card
OPTION I/O
slot 1
×8
OPTION I/O
slot 2
×8
Mixer section
Input channels 1–8
Input channels 9–16
Input channels 17–24
Now raise the faders of input channels 1/2 and check that the signals are being
input. If the level meters reach the “CLIP” position, you should lower [GAIN]
controls 1/2.
Tip!
The patching of the input jacks and input channels can be changed freely. For
details refer to page 133.
— Operation Guide
79
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
6. If you wish to set the input signals of INPUT jacks 1/2 as a stereo pair,
hold down [SEL] key 1 and press [SEL] key 2.
Adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered input channels can be specified as a
stereo pair. You will find it convenient to pair two channels that are inputting a
stereo source, so that all mix parameters except for phase and pan will be linked.
However, Effect Insert will not be linked.
When you simultaneously press the two [SEL] keys, a CHANNEL PAIRING popup
window will appear, allowing you to specify how pairing will occur.
7. Move the cursor to either the “INPUT 1→2,” “INPUT 2→1,” or “RESET
BOTH” button, and press the [ENTER] key.
One of the following can be selected as the pairing method.
❍ INPUT x→y (x=odd number, y=even number)
The parameters (except for phase and pan) of the odd-numbered channel will be
copied to the even-numbered channel.
❍ INPUT y→x (x=odd number, y=even number)
The parameters (except for phase and pan) of the even-numbered channel will be
copied to the odd-numbered channel.
❍ RESET BOTH
The parameters of both channels will be reset to their initial settings.
80
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Assign the signals to buses
When the AW4416 is in the initial state, bus outputs 1–8 of the mixer section are
patched as follows to tracks 1–16 of the recorder. In our example here, we will
assign the signal from the rhythm machine (or drum mics) input via input channels 1/2 to buses 1/2 and send to them to tracks 1/2 of the recorder.
Mixer section
Recorder
input patch
Buses 1–8
Recorder section
×8
×8
Tracks 1–8
Tracks 9–16
1. Press the [PAN] key → [F1] key.
The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan 1–16 page will appear. In this page you can assign
input channels 1–16 to buses (stereo bus, buses 1–8) and make pan settings.
Bus assign
1–8 buttons
ST button
PAN knob
2. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the input
channel 1 area. Turn the ST button off, and turn the bus assign 1/2 buttons on.
With these settings, the signal of input channel 1 will not be sent to the stereo
bus, but will be sent instead to buses 1–2. The ST button and bus assign 1/2 buttons of input channel 2 (which is paired with input channel 1) will follow these
settings.
Tip!
To switch an on-screen button on/off, move the cursor to the button and press the
[ENTER] key.
3. Move the cursor to the PAN knob of input channel 1, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to set the pan to far left (L16).
The PAN knob sets the stereo position between the L/R channels of the stereo
bus, and pans between odd-numbered buses and even-numbered buses of bus
1–8. In this example, the signal will be sent only to bus 1 if you rotate the PAN
knob to the far left.
— Operation Guide
81
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Note that the level when the PAN knob is positioned at full left or full right will
differ between paired and unpaired channels.
The level of a channel that is not paired will rise 3 dB when the PAN knob is
positioned at full left (L16) or full right (R16).
4. In the same way, move the cursor to the input channel 2 area, and set
the PAN knob to far right (R16).
Even for paired channels, the PAN knobs will not operate in tandem if the MODE
area Pan parameter is set to INDIVIDUAL (default setting). The PAN knobs will
move in tandem if this parameter is set to GANG or INVERTED GANG.
Set the tracks to record-ready mode
Next we will set tracks 1/2 of the recorder to record-ready mode, and adjust the
input level of each track.
1. In the level meters/counter section, press [REC TRACK SELECT] keys 1
and 2.
REC TRACK SELECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ST
[REC TRACK SELECT] keys 1 and 2 will begin blinking. In the level meters/
counter section, REC READY indicators 1 and 2 will blink red. This indicates that
tracks 1/2 are in record-ready mode.
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
NPUT
H
M
S
F
ms
REMAIN
ABS
REL
1
2
3
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
MTC
SCENE
MASTER
SLAVE
E
–dB 0
–dB 0
FINE 2
FINE 2
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
READY
INPUT
L
R
2. While producing sound on your instrument, watch level meters 1/2 in
the level meters/counter section.
The level of the signals being input to tracks 1/2 (which are in record-ready
mode) will be shown in level meters 1/2. If the red segment at the 0 dB position
lights for level meters 1/2, lower faders 1/2 (input channel 1/2 input levels).
In this example, tracks 1/2 are paired, so be sure to operate only one of the faders.
Tip!
When the AW4416 is in its initial state, the input monitor mode of each track is set
to “AUTO.” For tracks that are currently in record-ready mode, the level meters will
show the level of the input signal while the recorder is stopped, and the level of the
track playback signal when the recorder is playing back.
82
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
When tracks are paired, you must operate only one of the faders. Attempting to
move both faders simultaneously will place a strain on the motor, and may cause
malfunctions.
Make monitor settings
Now we will send the signal of monitor channels 1/2 to the stereo bus, so that it
can be monitored via the MONITOR OUT jacks or the PHONES jack.
1. Press the [PAN] key → [F3] key.
The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan MONI page will appear. In this page you can make
bus assignments and pan settings for monitor channels 1–16.
2. Press the [MONI] key.
Monitor channels 1–16 will be selected as the mixing layer.
3. Hold down [SEL] key 1, and press [SEL] key 2.
Just as we did for input channels 1/2, we will also pair monitor channels 1/2.
When you simultaneously hold down the monitor channel 1/2 [SEL] keys, the
CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will appear.
4. Move the cursor to one of the three buttons and press the [ENTER] key.
Monitor channels 1/2 will be paired.
5. In the monitor channel 1/2 area, make sure that the ST buttons are on
and the 1–8 buttons are off.
With these settings, the signal of the monitor channels will be sent to the stereo
bus.
— Operation Guide
83
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
6. In the same way as for the input channels, set the PAN knobs of monitor
channels 1/2 to far left (L16) for channel 1 and far right (R16) for channel 2.
7. Make sure that [ON] keys 1/2 and the STEREO [ON] key are on, and
raise faders 1/2 and the STEREO fader to the 0 dB position.
When tracks are paired, you must operate only one of the faders. Attempting to
move both faders simultaneously will place a strain on the motor, and may cause
malfunctions.
8. While producing sound on your instrument, watch the L/R level meters
of the level meter/counter.
The signal from the rhythm machine (or drum mics) will be sent via tracks 1/2 →
monitor channels 1/2 to the stereo bus. If the red 0 dB segment lights, lower faders 1/2 (input level of monitor channels 1/2).
E
–dB 0
H
M
S
F
ms
REMAIN
ABS
REL
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
MTC
MASTER
SLAVE
E
–dB 0
–dB 0
FINE 2
FINE 2
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FINE 2
SCENE
16
READY
INPUT
L
R
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
L
R
L/R level meter
9. Raise the MONITOR OUT control/PHONES control.
You can monitor the input signal via your monitor system or headphones.
Note that the signals being controlled here are not the signals recorded on the
recorder; rather, they are the signals passing through the recorder. Operating the
pan, fader, or [ON] key of a monitor channel will not affect the signal that is
recorded.
84
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Let’s record!
1. Press the Locate section [RTZ] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
6
5
OUT
2
SET
3
B
ROLL
BACK
0
CANCEL
RTZ
NO
The level meter/counter and the display counter will rewind to zero
(00:00:00.000).
Tip!
With the default settings of the song, hours (hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds)
are selected as the counter unit of the level meter/counter and display counter.
However you may switch this to time code display (hours/minutes/seconds/frames/
sub-frames) or measure display (measure/beat/tick) if desired.
2. To begin recording, hold down the Transport section [REC] (●) key and
press the [PLAY] (®) key.
The [REC] key and [PLAY] key will light, and the red REC READY indicators of the
[REC TRACK SELECT] keys 1/2 and the level meter/counter will change from
blinking to lit.
When you attempt to record the signal being input from the DIGITAL STEREO IN
jack, the display may sometimes indicate “DIGITAL-ST-IN-PROHIBIT,” and you
will be unable to perform step 2. In this case, go to UTILITY screen Prefer.2 page
([UTILITY] key → [F3] key), and set CD/DAT DIGITAL REC to ENABLE. (For
details refer to Reference Guide “UTILITY” screen.)
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
REW
REW
FF
STOP
FF
STOP
PLAY
REC
PLAY
REC
— Operation Guide
85
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
If the following keys are on, the keys of the Locate section and the Transport section will have no effect. (Alternatively, the functions assigned to the keys will
change.) Select a different key before you continue with this procedure.
• WORK NAVIGATE section: [SONG] key, [MASTERING] key, [CD PLAY] key
• UNIT section: [FILE] key
• RECORDER section: [EDIT] key
• SAMPLING PAD section: [EDIT] pad (except for when the Trig.List page is displayed)
3. Start the rhythm machine (drum) performance.
4. When the performance is finished, press the [STOP] (■) key.
5. To listen to the recorded content, press the Locate section [RTZ] key,
and then press the Transport section [PLAY] (®) key.
6. When you are satisfied with the recorded content, press the [STOP] (■)
key to stop the transport. Then press [REC TRACK SELECT] keys 1/2 to
defeat record-ready mode for tracks 1/2.
Tip!
• By using the [ALL SAFE] key instead of step 6, you can cancel record-ready
mode in one operation.
• If you wish to re-do the recording, repeat steps 1–4.
• We recommend that you save the song whenever you take a break from your
work. (→ P.106)
86
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Overdubbing
In this section we will explain how to record an electric bass connected to
INPUT 8 (HI-Z) jack while monitoring the rhythm machine (or drums) recorded
on tracks 1/2.
Set the input level
1. While producing sound on your instrument, adjust [GAIN] control 8 so
that the PEAK indicator of INPUT 8 (HI-Z) lights briefly when you play
most loudly.
The INPUT 8 (HI-Z) jack is an input jack designed for high impedance instruments. It cannot be used simultaneously with the conventional INPUT 8 (phone)
jack.
2. Press the [HOME] key → [F1] key.
The HOME screen 1–24/Rtn page will appear.
3. Press the MIXING LAYER section [1–16] key to select input channels 1–
16 as the mixing layer.
4. Make sure that [ON] key 8 is turned on, and raise fader 8 to the 0 dB
position.
To avoid confusion, turn off the [ON] keys for all input channels that you are not
using.
5. While producing sound on your instrument, watch the input level of
input channel 8 that is displayed in the on-screen level meter.
If the AW4416 is in the initial state, the electric bass connected to the INPUT 8
(HI-Z) jack will be sent to input channel 8. If the level meter reaches the “CLIP”
position, lower [GAIN] control 8.
— Operation Guide
87
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Assign the signal to a bus
Here we will make settings so that the electric bass signal being input from input
channel 8 will be sent to recorder track 3 via bus 3.
1. Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key.
The VIEW screen CH View page will appear. The CH View page shows all mix
parameters of the currently selected channel. (Major parameters can also be
operated here.) It is convenient to use this page when you wish to control all the
mix parameters of a specific channel.
In the preceding section “Recording the first track,” we used the PAN/ROUTE
screen to set bus assignments and pan for multiple channels at once. Here, however, we are going to use the VIEW screen CH View page to perform the same
operations.
Bus assign
1–8 buttons
ST button
PAN knob
2. In the MIXING LAYER section, press the [1–16] key → [SEL] key 8.
On the AW4416, you select the channel to be controlled by selecting a mixing
layer in the MIXING LAYER section, and then pressing a [SEL] key to select a
channel. When you are using the CH View page, the currently selected channel
will be shown in the upper left of the display. The corresponding [SEL] key will
also light.
Selected
channel
3. Move the cursor to the PAN/ROUTE area. Turn the ST button off and the
bus assign 3 button on.
4. Make sure that the PAN/ROUTE area PAN knob is positioned in the center (CENTER).
With these settings, the signal of input channel 8 will no longer be sent to the stereo bus, but will be sent to bus 3 instead.
Note that the level of a channel that is not paired will rise 3 dB when the PAN
knob is positioned at full left (L16) or full right (R16).
88
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Put the track in record-ready mode
Next we will put track 3 of the recorder in record-ready mode, and adjust the
input level.
1. In the level meters/counter section, press [REC TRACK SELECT] key 3.
REC TRACK SELECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ST
[REC TRACK SELECT] key 3 and REC READY indicator 3 in the level meter/
counter will blink, indicating that track 3 is in record-ready mode.
H
M
S
F
ms
REMAIN
ABS
REL
2
3
4
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
MTC
SCENE
MASTER
SLAVE
E
–dB 0
–dB 0
FINE 2
FINE 2
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
READY
INPUT
L
R
2. Make sure that [ON] key 8 is lit, and while producing sound on your
instrument, watch level meter 3 in the level meters/counter section.
Level meter 3 will show the level of the input signal of track 3. If the red 0 dB segment lights, lower fader 8 (input level of input channel 8).
— Operation Guide
89
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Make monitor settings
We will make settings so that the signal of the rhythm machine (drums) that were
earlier recorded on tracks 1/2 and the bass signal being recorded on track 3 will
be sent to the stereo bus, and can be monitored via the MONITOR OUT jacks or
PHONES jack.
1. Press the [PAN] key → [F3] key.
The PAN/ROUTE screen PAN Moni page will appear, allowing you to make pan
and bus assignment settings for monitor channels 1–16.
2. For monitor channel 3, turn the ST button on and the bus assign 1–8
buttons off.
At this time, verify that the ST button is on and the bus assign 1–8 button is off for
monitor channels 1–2 as well.
3. Move the cursor to the PAN knob of monitor channel 3, and pan the
bass where you can monitor it most comfortably.
4. Make sure that [ON] key 3 is turned on. Then produce sound on your
bass, and raise fader 3 to a volume that is comfortable for monitoring.
90
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Using EQ and the dynamics processor
By using the four-band EQ and dynamics processor that are provided for each
input channel, you can process the bass sound as you record it on a track.
❒ Using the four-band EQ
1. In the MIXING LAYER section, press the [1–16] key → [SEL] key 8.
[SEL] key 8 will light, and input channel 8 will be selected for control.
2. Press one of the EQ [HIGH]/[HI-MID]/[LO-MID]/[LOW] keys in the row
at the right of the display to select the band that you wish to control.
When you press a key, the settings of that band will appear for a time in the upper
right of the display.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
EQ
EQ
HI
HI-MID
LO-MID
HIGH
LO
HI-MID
LO-MID
LOW
Tip!
The keys/controls at the right of the display can be used as dedicated controls for
the channel that is currently selected by the [SEL] key. As with EQ, you can also use
the [PAN] control located at the right of the display to adjust the panning of the currently selected channel.
3. Use the EQ [Q]/[F]/[G] controls to adjust the band that you selected in
step 2. The function of each control is described below.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
PAN
F
G
Q
PAN
Q
F
G
• [Q] .................Adjust the steepness of each band. The range is 10.0–0.10, and
higher settings will produce a steeper EQ curve.
The [Q] control of the HIGH band can also be used as a switch
to change the EQ type between shelving and LPF. The [Q] control of the LOW band can also be used as a switch to change
the EQ type between shelving and HPF.
— Operation Guide
91
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
• [F] .................. Set the center frequency of each band. For each band, the
range is 21 Hz–20.1 kHz.
• [G] ................. Set the amount of boost/cut for each band. For each band, the
range is ±18 dB.
When you operate the EQ [Q]/[F]/[G] controls, the parameter values of that band
will briefly appear in the upper right of the display.
Tip!
As an alternative way to make EQ settings, you can also use the EQ/ATT/GRP screen
EQ/Att page ([EQ] key → [F1] key). The EQ/Att page displays all EQ parameters of
the currently selected channel.
If the sound does not change when you operate the EQ, check whether the EQ
ON button is turned on in the EQ/ATT/GRP screen EQ/ATT page.
❒ Using the dynamics processor
1. In the MIXING LAYER section, press the [1–16] key → [SEL] key 8.
[SEL] key 8 will light, and input channel 8 will be selected for control.
2. Press the [DYN] key → [F2].
The DYN/DLY screen Library page will appear.
Library list
In this page you can load or save dynamics programs from or to the dynamics
library. From the library list in the center of the screen, you can select the dynamics program that you wish to load or save.
3. Move the cursor to the library list, and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to
move the cursor location to “011.E.B.Finger.”
Dynamics library numbers 000–040 are read-only programs, and contains standard dynamics settings for frequently used instruments. For this example, we will
select a program named “E.B. Finger.”
4. Move the cursor to the RECALL button at the left of the library list, and
press the [ENTER] key.
92
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
5. A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear, asking you confirm the
recall operation.
6. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The “E.B.Finger” dynamics program will be loaded into input channel 8.
7. Press the [F1] key.
The DYN/DLY screen Dyn.Edit page will appear. In this page you can set the
parameters of the dynamics processor.
8. Press the [ENTER] key, and turn on the ON/OFF button located in the
lower left of the screen.
As the name suggests, the ON/OFF button turns the dynamics processor on/off.
9. While playing the bass, move the cursor to the PARAMETER area in the
lower right of the screen, and adjust the parameters of the dynamics
processor.
• Five types of dynamics processor are provided: CMP (compressor), EXP
(expander), GAT (gate), CPS (compander S), and CPH (compander H). Each
type has different parameters. (For details on the parameters of each type, see
the Reference Guide.)
• It is not possible to change the type of the dynamics processor in the Dyn.Edit
page. For this reason if you wish to use a specific type, you must first load a
program that uses that type from the dynamics library, and then modify its
parameters as necessary.
— Operation Guide
93
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Let’s overdub!
1. Press the Locate section [RTZ] key.
2. To begin recording, hold down the Transport section [REC] (●) key and
press the [PLAY] (®) key.
The [REC] key and [PLAY] key will light, and the red REC READY indicator of
track 3 will change from blinking to lit.
3. Play the bass while listening to the rhythm machine (drum) performance
recorded on tracks 1/2.
Tip!
If you wish to adjust the volume at which you are monitoring the rhythm machine
(drums) and bass, press the MIXING LAYER section [MONI] key, and adjust faders
1–3.
4. When you are finished playing, press the [STOP] (■) key.
5. To listen to the recorded performance, press the Locate section [RTZ]
key, and then press the Transport section [PLAY] (®) key.
6. If you are satisfied with the recorded performance, press [REC TRACK
SELECT] key 3 to defeat record-ready mode for track 3.
If you wish to continue overdubbing more instrumental tracks, simply use the
same procedure. Go ahead and record the remaining instruments.
Tip!
If you wish to try the recording again, press the [UNDO] key and repeat steps 1–4.
It is also possible to re-record from the middle of the song. If you will be re-recording repeatedly from the same location, it is convenient to assign a marker (→ P.121)
to that location so that you can move rapidly to it, or to use the auto punch-in/out
function (→ P.130).
94
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Mixdown
In this section we will explain the procedure for creating a stereo mix of the signals recorded on tracks 1–16, applying internal effects, and recording the stereo
track on the hard disk.
Creating the mix balance of the tracks
1. Make sure that [REC TRACK SELECT] keys 1–16 are dark (record-ready
mode is defeated). Also make sure that the [ON] key is dark for all input
channels 1–24.
Tip!
If necessary, the input signals from input channels 1–24 can be mixed down
together with the signals of tracks 1–16. In this case, turn on the [ON] keys of the
input channels that you wish to use, so that they are lit.
2. Press the [MONI] key.
Monitor channels 1–16 will be selected as the mixing layer.
3. Press the [PAN] key → [F3] key.
The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan MONI page will appear, allowing you to make pan
settings and bus assignments for monitor channels 1–16.
4. For monitor channels 1–16, turn the ST button on and the bus assign 1–
8 buttons off.
With these settings, all monitor channels will be sent to the stereo bus.
5. Use the PAN knobs of monitor channels 1–16 to set the stereo position
of each track.
Tip!
You can also use the [SEL] keys to select a channel and use the [PAN] control at the
right of the display to set the pan of the corresponding monitor channel.
— Operation Guide
95
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
6. Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB position.
7. Make sure that [ON] keys 1–16 and the STEREO [ON] key are lit, play
back the song from the beginning, and use faders 1–16 to set the level
of each track.
At this time, watch the L/R level meter of the level meter/counter, and do not
allow the red 0 dB segment to light.
8. To adjust the EQ of a specific channel, use the [SEL] key to select the
channel and operate the EQ [HIGH]/[HI-MID]/[LO-MID]/[LOW] keys and
the EQ [Q]/[F]/[G] controls.
9. To use the dynamics processor of a specific channel, use the [SEL] key to
select the channel and press [DYN] key → [F2] key to load the desired
dynamics program.
For the procedure of loading a dynamics program, refer to page 92. To edit the
dynamics processor parameters, press the MIXER section [DYN] key → [F1] key
to access the DYN/DLY screen Dyn.Edit page.
Using the Solo function
The AW4416 provides a flexible Solo function. By pressing the top panel [SOLO]
during recording or playback and using one of the [ON] keys to select a desired
channel, you can monitor only the corresponding channel. Here we will explain
how you can use the Solo function to monitor only the desired track during mixdown.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F3] key.
The SET UP screen Solo Setup page will appear. In this page you can make various settings for the Solo function.
If the Solo Setup tab is not assigned to the [F3] key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1]
key to switch the tab, and then press the [F3] key.
96
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Tip!
As an alternative to using the Solo function, you can also monitor just a specific
track by pressing the TRACK [CUE] switch in the level meters/counter section, and
then using [REC TRACK SELECT] keys 1–16 to select a track. By using this method,
the direct output of the recorder (the signal that has not passed through the monitor
channel) can be sent directly to the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack.
2. Move the cursor to the SOLO STATUS area, and select one of the following two modes for the Solo function.
❍ RECORDING SOLO
In this mode, the solo signal is routed through the dedicated SOLO bus and output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack. The stereo bus and buses
1–8 will not be affected. You can monitor even channels that are not assigned to
the stereo bus or to buses 1–8, or channels whose [ON] key is turned off.
Tip!
If you will be using the Solo function during multitrack recording, it is convenient to
select RECORDING SOLO so that specific channels can be monitored without
affecting the stereo bus or buses 1–8.
❍ MIXDOWN SOLO
In this mode, the solo signal is routed through the stereo bus and output from the
MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack. When the Solo function is turned on,
only the soloed channels will be sent to the stereo bus, and the remaining channels will be muted. It will not be possible to monitor channels whose [ON] key is
turned off, nor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus.
If MIXDOWN SOLO mode is selected, the Solo Setup page LISTEN settings and
LEVEL settings will be ignored (they will be grayed out).
In this example, we will use MIXDOWN SOLO mode. Move the cursor to the
MIXDOWN SOLO button, and press the [ENTER] key.
3. Move the cursor to the SEL MODE area, and choose one of the following
ways in which the channel(s) to be monitored in Solo mode will be
selected.
❍ LAST SOLO
When the [SOLO] key is on, only the channel whose [ON] key was pressed last
will be monitored.
❍ MIX SOLO
When the [SOLO] key is on, all channels selected by their [ON] key will be monitored.
Move the cursor to one of these buttons, and press the [ENTER] key.
4. Move the cursor to the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL section, and select the
channel(s) that you wish to set to Solo Safe mode.
Solo Safe is a function that excludes specified channels from the Solo function
when MIXDOWN SOLO mode is selected. Move the cursor to the button(s) for
the channel(s) that you wish to set to Solo Safe, and press the [ENTER] key. (You
may select more than one channel.)
— Operation Guide
97
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Tip!
For example if the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL section RTN1/RTN2 buttons are on, the
Solo function will not affect return channels 1/2. This allows you to monitor the
soloed channel with an effect such as reverb still applied.
5. To use the Solo function, play back the recorder and press the [SOLO]
key.
The [SOLO] key and [ON] keys 1–16 will blink.
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
1
14
15
RTN
SEL
SEL
ON
ON
SOLO
2
16
6. Press the MIXING LAYER section [MONI] key, and press the [ON] key for
the monitor channel corresponding to the track you wish to monitor.
If you selected LAST SOLO in step 3, only the channel whose [ON] key was last
pressed will be monitored. If you selected MIX SOLO, all channels selected by
their [ON] key will be monitored.
At this time, all [ON] keys 1–16 other than the selected key(s) will go dark.
7. To defeat the Solo function, press the [SOLO] key once again.
Tip!
Solo operations using the [ON] keys are also linked for paired channels.
98
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Using the internal effects
The AW4416 provides two internal effects, which can be used either via AUX
send/return or by being inserted into a specific channel. Here we will explain
how to use the AUX bus to apply reverb to the signals of the tracks.
1. Press the [AUX 7] key → [F2] key.
The AUX7/EFF1 screen Library page will appear. In this page you can load or save
effect programs from or to the effect library. The list in the display shows the effect
programs that have been saved.
Tip!
When the AW4416 is in the initial state, the outputs of AUX buses 7/8 are patched
to the inputs of internal effects 1/2, and the outputs of internal effects 1/2 are
patched to return channels 1/2.
2. Move the cursor to the library list, and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to display “002.Reverb Room” at the cursor location.
In this example we will select a reverb room program.
Tip!
If desired, you can recall the effect program directly without having to reply to the
recall confirmation popup window. To make this setting, access the UTILITY screen
Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key → [F2] key), and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off.
3. Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the recall
operation.
4. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The “Reverb Room” effect program will be loaded into internal effect 1.
— Operation Guide
99
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
5. Press [PAN] key → [F2] key.
The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan 17–24 page will appear, allowing you to make pan
settings and bus assignments for input channels 17–24 and return channels 1/2.
6. Make sure that the RTN1 (return channel 1) area ST button is on, and
that the two PAN knobs are turned to the far left and right.
With these settings, the return signal from effect 1 will be sent to the stereo bus
and mixed with the signals of the monitor channels.
7. Press the [MONO] key → [AUX 7] key.
Monitor channels 1–16 will be selected as the mixing layer. In this state, faders 1–
16 will adjust the send level of the signals sent from monitor channels 1–16 to
AUX 7 (effect 1).
8. Play back the song from the beginning, and use faders 1–16 to adjust
the send level of each monitor channel.
9. If necessary, press the [HOME] key → [17–24 RTN] key and use fader 15
to readjust the effect return level.
Tip!
When the AW4416 is in the initial state, the faders of return channels 1/2 are set to
nominal level (0 dB).
100
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Other convenient functions
The mixer section of the AW4416 provides other convenient functions as
described below. You can use them as needed.
❒ Fader groups
This function groups fader operations for multiple channels. By moving a single
fader, you can adjust all faders in that group while preserving the current balance. To set or cancel fader groups, use the EQ/ATT/GRP screen FaderGrp page
([EQ] key → [F3] key). (Refer to Reference Guide “EQ/ATT/GRP screen/FaderGrp
page.”)
Faders in the same group must not be moved manually at the same time. Doing
so will strain the motors and cause malfunctions.
❒ Mute groups
This function groups [ON] key operations for multiple channels. (On and off statuses can be mixed.) By operating a single [ON] key, you can switch the on/off
status of each channel in the group. To set or cancel mute groups, use the EQ/
ATT/GRP screen MuteGrp page ([EQ] key → [F4] key). (Refer to Reference Guide
“EQ/ATT/GRP screen/MuteGrp page.”)
— Operation Guide
101
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
❒ Automix
By using this function, fader and [ON] key operations, changes in mix parameters
such as EQ and pan, and events such as scene memory or library selection can
be recorded and played back in realtime in synchronization with the song. You
can also record operations in multiple stages, or edit recorded events later. To
record or play back scene memories, you can use the AUTOMIX screen Main
page ([AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key), etc.
Recording the stereo track
The recorder section of the AW4416 provides a stereo track that is independent
of audio tracks 1–16, and which is used mainly as a master track for creating a
two-track mix.
Here we will explain the procedure of mixing the signals of tracks 1–16 and the
return signals from the internal effects into a stereo track to create a finished song.
1. Press the REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key.
The stereo track will be in record-ready mode.
REC TRACK SELECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ST
Tip!
The input of the stereo track is internally connected to the stereo output channel of
the mixer. This means that the L/R level meter in the level meters/counter section
can be used as the input level meter for the stereo track.
102
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
2. Play back the song from the beginning, and watch the L/R level meter in
the level meters/counter section.
If the red 0 dB segment lights, lower faders 1–16 and/or the STEREO fader.
E
–dB 0
H
M
S
F
ms
REMAIN
ABS
REL
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
MTC
MASTER
SLAVE
E
–dB 0
–dB 0
FINE 2
FINE 2
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FINE 2
SCENE
16
READY
INPUT
L
R
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
L
R
L/R level meter
3. After you have set the level, rewind the song to the beginning. Then
hold down the Transport section [REC] (●) key and press the [PLAY] key
(®).
Recording on the stereo track will begin.
In order to create an audio CD (44.1 kHz), there must be at least four seconds of
data in the stereo track.
4. When you are finished recording, press the [STOP] (■) key.
5. To listen to the newly recorded stereo track, press the Recorder section
[TRACK] key → [F3] key.
The TRACK screen Stereo page will appear, allowing you to play back or erase
the stereo track. When the AW4416 is in the initial state, the M (mute) button in
the upper left of the screen will be turned on, muting the stereo track.
6. Move the cursor to the M (mute) button and press the [ENTER] key.
Muting of the stereo track will be defeated, allowing the stereo track to play back.
At this time, the stereo track will automatically be assigned to monitor channels
1/2, and the remaining monitor channels will be muted. If you play back the song
in this state, the stereo track can be monitored via monitor channels 1/2 → stereo
bus.
— Operation Guide
103
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
However with this monitoring method, the signal will pass through the monitor
channel and the output channel, meaning that you will not necessarily be monitoring in a “flat” state. Here’s how you can output the stereo track directly from
the MONITOR OUT jacks.
7. In the level meters/counter section, turn the TRACK [CUE] key on.
REC TRACK SELECT
TRACK
CUE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALL
SAFE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ST
The TRACK [CUE] key is used to output the signal of the desired track directly to
the MONITOR OUT jacks. If you press the TRACK [CUE] key when the stereo
track is not muted, the TRACK [CUE] key will blink and the REC TRACK SELECT
[ST] key will blink red. This indicates that only the stereo track can be selected as
the signal for monitoring.
8. Press the REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key.
The TRACK [CUE] key and REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key will change from blinking to lit. This indicates that the stereo track is selected as the signal for monitoring.
When you use the TRACK [CUE] key, the signal will be output directly to the
MONITOR OUT jacks, and therefore the fader cannot be used to adjust the level.
To avoid sudden loud sounds, lower the MONITOR OUT control beforehand.
9. Press the Locate section [RTZ] key, and then press the Transport section
[PLAY] (®) key.
The signal of the stereo track will be sent in monaural directly to the MONITOR
OUT jacks.
10. If you are satisfied with the recorded result, turn off the TRACK [CUE]
key.
The REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key will go dark simultaneously. To defeat muting
for audio tracks 1–16, access the TRACK screen Stereo page and turn the M
(mute) button on once again.
Tip!
Only one stereo track can be used for each song. If you wish to try the mixdown
again, perform the Undo operation. If Undo is not possible, access the TRACK
screen Stereo page, move the cursor to the ST TRACK ERASE button in the right side
of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to erase the stereo track. Then record it
once again.
104
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
Saving a scene/song
❒ Saving a scene
If you wish to reproduce the mixer settings as well when you recall the current
song at a later time, you must store the current mix parameters as a Scene.
1. Use the [ ]/[ ] keys in the SCENE MEMORY section of the top panel
to select the store destination scene number (01–96).
The currently selected scene number will appear in the upper right of the level
meter/counter.
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
SCENE MEMORY
SCENE MEMORY
RECALL
STORE
RECALL
STORE
MTC
M
S
F
ms
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
SCENE
MASTER
MTC
SCENE
MASTER
SLAVE
SLAVE
E
E
–dB 0
FINE 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
–dB 0
FINE 2
L
R
Scene number 00 contains a preset recall-only scene that returns all mix parameters to their default state. For this reason, it is not possible to store a scene into
number 00.
2. Press the SCENE MEMORY section [STORE] key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the
scene memory.
Tip!
If STORE CONFIRMATION is turned “OFF” in the UTILITY screen Prefer.1 page
([UTILITY] key → [F2] key), the scene will be stored directly to the specified scene
number without displaying this confirmation popup window. This is more convenient if you will be repeatedly overwriting a scene onto the same scene number.
— Operation Guide
105
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
3. As desired, assign a scene name of up to 16 characters. (For details on
inputting characters, refer to page 60.) When you are finished, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The scene will be stored.
❒ Saving a song
The current song will be saved automatically when you create a new song, load
an existing song, or perform the shut-down procedure. However as a precaution
against the power being accidentally turned off while you are working, it is a
good idea to save your song frequently, and not just after completing the mixdown.
• When you save a song, the scene memory contents and only the scene number (i.e., not the settings) of the most recently stored/recalled scene will be
saved together with the song. Be aware that the current mix parameters are not
saved.
• When an existing song is loaded, the scene number that was most recently
stored/recalled for that song will be displayed in the upper right of the level
meter/counter. If you wish to reproduce both the song and the mix parameters,
you must press the SCENE MEMORY section [RECALL] key and recall that
scene immediately after loading the song.
1. Press the WORK NAVIGATE section [SONG] key → [F1] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear.
The data for the current song (date, size, quantization bits, sampling frequency,
protect) shown here in the song list is the data for when the song was last saved.
When you perform the following Save procedure and press the [ENTER] key, it
will be overwritten by the new data.
2. Move the cursor to the SAVE button at the bottom of the screen, and
press the [ENTER] key.
106
— Operation Guide
Chapter5—Recording on the AW4416
A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Save
operation.
Tip!
When you shut down the AW4416, the current song will be saved automatically.
However, we recommend that you save the song manually when you are finished
recording (→ P.177). If you fail to do this, the song will revert to the last-saved state
if the power of the AW4416 is turned off accidentally.
3. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The song will be saved.
— Operation Guide
107
6
Transport/locate operations
This chapter explains transport and locate operations on the AW4416.
Table of transport key operations
The function of the keys in the transport section of the AW4416 will change
depending on the status (current operating mode) of the transport. The following
table shows how the transport keys change function according to the status of the
transport.
Status/
Transport keys
Stopped
Playing
Rewinding
Fastforwarding
Recording
A-B
repeating
—
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Play
—
Play
Play
Play
(punch-out)
—
Rewind
(8X)
Rewind
(8X)
Switch rewind
speeds
(8X⇔16X)
Rewind (8X)
—
Defeat
repeat, and
rewind (8X)
Fast-forward (8X)
Fast-forward (8X)
Fast-forward
(8X)
Switch fastforward
speeds
(8X⇔16X)
—
Defeat
repeat, and
fast-forward
(8X)
Record*
Record*
(punch-in)
Play
Play
—
—
STOP
PLAY
REW
FF
REC
PLAY
+
* : Recording will occur only if any of the [REC TRACK SELECT] keys are blinking.
— : Key has no function.
— Operation Guide
109
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Shuttle function (cue/review operation)
While the transport is stopped or playing, you can operate the [SHUTTLE] dial to
play forward (cue) or play backward (review) at various speeds.
The cue or review speed will change according to the angle of the [SHUTTLE]
dial, as shown in the following diagram. When the [SHUTTLE] dial is returned to
the center, the shuttle function is defeated, and the transport will return to the
state in which it was before you operated the dial (i.e., stopped or playing).
Review (backward)
–1/4
–1/2
–1
Stop
–2
–4
–8
–16
+1/4
Cue (forward)
+1/2
+1(normal speed)
+2
+4
+8
+16
Nudge function
“Nudge” is a function that repeatedly plays back a short region before and after
the current location, and lets you move the current location forward or backward
in small steps so that you can search for a desired point. This lets you accurately
specify a point in the song, such as when setting the auto punch-in/out points, or
setting the range for a track editing operation.
❒ Using the Nudge function
1. Use normal transport operations or the shuttle function to locate to the
general area of the desired point in the song.
2. Press [JOG ON].
The [JOG ON] key will light, and playback will repeat over a fixed region (the
default setting is 100 milliseconds) starting at the current location.
The result may sound different depending on the number of tracks that are being
played back simultaneously.
110
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
3. To move the current location forward, turn the [DATA/JOG] dial toward
the right. To move the current location backward, turn the [DATA/JOG]
dial toward the left.
If time display (SECOND) is selected as the counter display mode, the current
location will move in millisecond steps. If time code display (TIME CODE) is
selected as the counter display mode, the current location will move in sub-frame
steps.
Use [SHUTTLE] dial
to move to approximate location
Current
location
Use [DATA/JOG]
dial to move in
small steps
Song tracks
Nudge time
If you use the Nudge function when the counter display is set to MEASURE, turning the [DATA/JOG] dial will move only in steps of one beat, meaning that you
will not be able to set the location precisely. Before using the Nudge function,
you should switch the counter display to either the Time display or the Time Code
display (Refer to Reference Guide “SONG screen/Setting page”).
Tip!
Normally, turning the Nudge function on will repeatedly play a 100 msec region
starting at the current location. However, you can change the play mode of the
Nudge function so that the repeated region ends at the current location, or adjust
the length (“nudge time”) of the repeated region. For details on play mode and
nudge time settings, refer to the section below, “Nudge function settings.”
4. To defeat the Nudge function, press the [JOG ON] key or the [STOP] key
of the transport section.
— Operation Guide
111
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
❒ Nudge function settings
Here’s how to adjust the nudge time and play mode of the Nudge function.
1. With the song stopped, press the [UTILITY] key → [F3] key.
Nudge function
settings
2. To set the nudge time, move the cursor to the TIME field of the NUDGE
area, and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the nudge time (25–800
msec).
3. To change the play mode of the nudge function, move the cursor to the
PLAY MODE field of the NUDGE area, and press the [ENTER] key to
switch between the following two play modes.
• AFTER...................Repeatedly play back a range starting at the current location
and extending the length of the nudge time setting.
• BEFORE ................Repeatedly play back a range corresponding to the length of
the nudge time setting and ending at the current location.
112
PLAY MODE= BEFORE
PLAY MODE= AFTER
Current
location
Current
location
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Rollback function
While the song is stopped or playing, you can press the [ROLL BACK] key of the
Locate section to move the current location back by a fixed length. This is convenient when you are playing back, and come to a location that you wish to listen
to once again. The rollback time is set to 5 seconds by default, but can be
adjusted as desired.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
1. With the song stopped, press the [UTILITY] key → [F3] key.
Rollback time
setting
2. Move the cursor to the ROLLBACK TIME field, and use the [DATA/JOG]
dial to set the rollback time.
The rollback time can be adjusted in millisecond steps over a range of 0–5 seconds (default setting is 5 seconds).
3. When the song is stopped or playing, press the [ROLL BACK] key.
If the [ROLL BACK] key is pressed while stopped, the current location will simply
move back by the length of the rollback time. If pressed while playing, playback
will resume immediately after the rollback occurs.
— Operation Guide
113
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Locating to a specific point
You can directly specify a locate point as a numerical value, and locate to it.
Here’s how.
1. With the transport stopped, press the [NUM LOCATE] key of the Locate
section.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
If you have selected a screen where normal transport operations cannot be performed, such as the SONG screen or the MASTERING screen, the [NUM
LOCATE] key cannot be used even if the cursor is displayed at the counter in the
upper part of the display.
The cursor will move to the counter in the upper part of the display.
Cursor
2. To specify the locate point using the [DATA/JOG] dial, use the CURSOR
[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the digit that you wish to change,
and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the value.
3. To specify the locate point using the numeric keys (keys 0–9 of the
locate section), move the cursor to the lowest digit of the value you wish
to input, and use the numeric keys to directly input the value.
If the time display (SECOND) is selected as the counter display type, you can
specify the value as hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds; if time code display
(TIME CODE) is selected, you can specify hours/minutes/seconds/frames/subframes; if measure display (MEASURE) is selected, you can specify measures/
beats.
4. To execute the Locate operation, press the [ENTER] key.
114
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Locating to the zero location of the
counter
When the song is stopped or playing, you can press the [RTZ] key of the Locate
section to locate to the zero location of the currently displayed counter. (If the
counter is displaying measures, you will locate to the beginning of the first measure.)
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
If the counter display type is set to Time (SECOND) or Time Code (TIME CODE),
the point to which the [RTZ] key will locate will depend on whether absolute
time or relative time is being displayed.
❍ If the counter shows absolute time (ABS)
Pressing the [RTZ] key will locate to the 00:00:00.00 position if the counter
shows the time code, or to the start point (zero absolute time) if the counter
shows the time.
❍ If the counter shows relative time (REL)
Pressing the [RTZ] key will locate to the point that the user specified as zero relative time. (For details on setting the zero relative time, refer to the section below.)
If Measure display (MEASURE) is selected for the counter, you cannot switch
between absolute time and relative time; pressing the [RTZ] key will always
locate to the start point of the song.
❒ Setting the zero relative time location
You can use the following procedure to set the relative (REL) zero point that is displayed by the counter.
1. Locate the song to the point that you wish to set as relative zero.
2. Hold down the Locate section [SET] key, and press the [RTZ] key.
If the counter had been displaying the relative time (REL), the counter display will
be reset to zero (00:00:00.000). If the counter had been displaying the absolute
time (ABS), it will automatically switch to relative time, and will be reset to zero
(00:00:00.000).
— Operation Guide
115
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
3. If you wish to return the counter to the absolute time display, press the
[ABS/REL] key.
The specified relative zero location will be displayed as follows in the TRACK
screen → TR View page that appears when you press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.
Zero relative time location
Tip!
The zero relative time location is saved on the hard disk as part of the currently
selected song.
116
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Locating to the start/end points
The start point and end point normally correspond to the beginning and end of
the song. When you create a new song, absolute time 00:00:00.000 will be set as
the default start point. When you record a song, the last point in the song will
automatically be set as the end point. (If you extend the length of the song, the
end point will move accordingly.) You can locate to the start point by pressing the
[
] key of the Locate section, or to the end point by pressing the [
] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
The start point and end point will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen TR
View page that appears when you press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.
Start point
End point
Tip!
The locations of the start point and end point can be adjusted as desired (→ P.123).
— Operation Guide
117
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
A-B repeat
A-B Repeat is a function that repeatedly plays back the region between the point
A and point B that you specify. The A/B points can be set when the song is either
stopped or playing.
❒ Setting the A/B points
1. Locate the song to the location where you wish to set point A (the
beginning of the repeated playback).
2. Hold down the Locate section [SET] key and press the [A] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
5
IN
OUT
2
A
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
CANCEL
RTZ
NO
The [A] key will light, indicating that point A has been set.
3. Locate the song to the location where you wish to set point B (the end
of the repeated playback).
4. Hold down the [SET] key and press the [B] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
The [B] key will light, indicating that point B has been set.
Tip!
You can also use the [A]/[B] keys to locate directly to points A/B.
❒ Performing A-B repeat playback
5. To perform repeat playback, press the Locate section [REPEAT] key when
the transport is stopped. The transport will automatically locate to point
A.
Tip!
If you press the [REPEAT] key during playback, repeated playback between points A/
B will begin automatically. If you press the [REPEAT] key during repeat playback,
you will return to normal playback.
118
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
6. Press the [PLAY] key. Repeated playback between points A/B will begin.
7. To defeat A-B repeat, press the [REPEAT] key.
The [REPEAT] key will go dark, indicating that A-B repeat has been defeated. If
you pressed the [REPEAT] key to defeat A-B repeat, normal playback will resume
from that point.
The A/B points that you specify will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen
TR View page that appears when you press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.
Point A
Point B
The A and B points must be at least one second apart.
Tip!
• If you set point B earlier than point A and press the [REPEAT] key, playback
will repeat from B → A.
• The A/B points you set can be deleted (→ P.126) or moved (→ P.123) as
desired.
• The A/B point settings are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently
selected song.
— Operation Guide
119
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
In/out points
The AW4416 remembers the locations at which recording was last begun and
ended as the In point and the Out point. When the In and Out points are memorized, the [IN] and [OUT] keys will light. In this state, you can press the [IN] key
or the [OUT] key to locate to the In or Out points. You can also set the In or Out
points manually.
❒ Setting the In point/Out point
1. Locate the song to the location where you wish to set the In point.
2. Hold down the Locate section [SET] key and press the [IN] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
5
IN
OUT
2
A
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
CANCEL
RTZ
NO
3. Locate the song to the location where you wish to set the Out point.
4. Hold down the [SET] key and press the [OUT] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
The In point and Out point that you specify will be displayed as follows in the
TRACK screen TR View page that appears when you press the [TRACK] key →
[F1] key.
In point
Out point
Tip!
• The In/Out points are also used as the auto punch-in/out points used by auto
punch-in/out (→ P.130).
• The In/Out point settings are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently
selected song.
You must set the In point ahead of the Out point.
120
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Markers
The AW4416 allows you to set up to 99 markers at any desired locations in the
song. You can use the [ ]/[ ] keys to search/locate these markers. Markers are
convenient when you wish to locate repeatedly to specific points in the song.
❒ Setting a marker
1. Locate the song to the point where you wish to set a marker.
2. Press the Locate section [MARK] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
5
IN
OUT
2
A
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
CANCEL
RTZ
NO
Marker settings can be made when the song is either playing or stopped. When
you press the [MARK] key, a message of “MARK SET” will be displayed briefly at
the bottom of the display, indicating that marker has been inserted at that point.
Each time you press the [MARK] key, a new marker will be inserted.
Marker settings cannot be made while recording.
❒ Locating to a marker
3. To locate to the marker immediately before the current location, press
the Locate section [ ] key. To locate to the marker immediately following the current location, press the [ ] key.
MARK SEARCH
NUM
LOCATE
7
8
9
MARK
LAST REC
AUTO
PUNCH
REPEAT
4
1
IN
A
5
OUT
2
B
6
SET
3
ROLL
BACK
0
RTZ
CANCEL
NO
The [ ] key will light if a marker exists before the current location, and the [
key will light if a marker exists after the current location.
— Operation Guide
]
121
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
A number in the range of 1–99 will be assigned to each marker you set, and these
will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen TR View page that appears when
you press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.
Markers
Please note that the numbers 1–99 do not indicate the order in which you specified the markers; they indicate the order from the beginning of the song. For
example if you insert a new marker between two existing markers, the subsequent markers will be renumbered.
Tip!
• Marker settings are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently selected
song.
• The markers you set can be deleted (→ P.125) or moved (→ P.123) as desired.
122
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Adjusting the location of a locate
point
The location of the Start/End points, A/B points, In/Out points, and Markers can
be adjusted as desired.
1. Press the [TRACK] key → [F4] key.
A screen will appear in which you can adjust the various locate points.
A point
B point
In point
Out point
Start Point
End point
Marker number
• Except for the Start/End points, the displayed location of the locate points will
differ depending on the currently selected counter display type (Time, Time
Code, Measure). The Start point and End point are always displayed as time
code, regardless of the currently selected display method.
• The automix of the AW4416 operates according to the absolute time of the
song. Be aware that if you change the start point after recording events in the
automix, the song will no longer be synchronized with the automix.
2. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor, and use
the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the location of each locate point.
When you change the Start point, the absolute time zero of the song will change.
For example if you change the Start point to “00:00:05:00.00,” the location five
seconds after the beginning of the song will be specified as absolute time zero. (If
you press the [RTZ] key when absolute time is displayed, you will move to this
point.)
• The smallest unit of adjustment will be a “millisecond” if time (SECOND) is
selected as the counter display method, “sub-frame” if time code display (TIME
CODE) is selected, or “beats” if measure display (MEASURE) is selected.
• When adjusting the location of a marker, it is not possible to move the marker
beyond the preceding or following marker.
— Operation Guide
123
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Start point= 00:00:00:00.00
Absolute time (ABS) zero
00:00:00.000
00:00:05.000
00:00:10.000
00:00:00.000
00:00:05.000
Song
Start point = 00:00:05:00.00
Absolute time (ABS) zero
– 0:00:05
05.000
Song
However, please be aware that changing the Start point will not affect the time
code display of the counter. If you want the time code display to match the absolute time display, set the time code top to the Start point (Refer to Reference
Guide “SONG screen/Setting page.”).
Start point = 00:00:05:00.00
Absolute time (ABS) zero
Time
– 0:00:05
05.000
00:00:00.000
00:00:10.000
00:00:00:00.00
00:00:05
05:00.00
00:00:10:00.00
Song
Time code
display
124
— Operation Guide
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Deleting a locate point
A locate point (except for the Start/End points) can be deleted as follows.
Be aware that a locate point you delete cannot be recovered.
1. Press the [TRACK] key → [F4] key.
2. Move the cursor to the display area of the locate point you wish to
delete, and press the [ENTER] key.
The selected locate point will be deleted. When you delete the In/Out point or
the A/B point, the corresponding key ([IN]/[OUT] key or [A]/[B] key) will go dark.
Tip!
• If using the mouse, you can delete a locate point by clicking it in the locate
point display and then clicking the DELETE button in the lower right of the display.
• The DELETE button is used only when operating the mouse. When using the
top panel keys, you can delete simply by moving the cursor to the desired
locate point or marker and pressing the [ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
125
Chapter6—Transport/locate operations
Deleting a locate point using the
panel keys
A locate point (except for the Start/End points) can be deleted as follows using
only the panel keys.
❒ Deleting an In/Out point or A/B point
Hold down the [CANCEL] key, and press the key for the locate point that you
wish to delete ([A]/[B] key or [IN]/[OUT] key). The locate point will be deleted,
and the corresponding key will go dark.
❒ Deleting a marker
Use the [ ]/[ ] keys to locate to the marker that you wish to delete. Then hold
down the [CANCEL] key and press the [MARK] key. A message of “MARK ERASE”
will briefly appear at the bottom of the display, indicating that the selected
marker has been erased.
126
— Operation Guide
7
Punch-in/out
This chapter explains how to use punch-in/out.
About punch-in/out
Punch-in/out is a method for re-recording a portion of a previously recorded
track. There are two types of punch-in/out.
❒ Manual punch-in/out (→ P.128)
In this method you can punch in or out manually, using the transport keys of the
AW4416 or a separately sold foot switch (Yamaha FC-5). If a foot switch is used,
the entire procedure of playback → punch-in → punch-out → stop can be performed using your foot, which is convenient when you are playing an instrument
while operating the AW4416.
❒ Auto punch-in/out (→ P.130)
In this method, punch-in/out will occur automatically at the points that you specify ahead of time (the auto punch-in/out points). This method allows the location
to be specified with sub-frame or millisecond accuracy, and lets you punch-in/
out repeatedly. You can also practice (rehearse) the auto punch-in/out.
— Operation Guide
127
Chapter7—Punch-in/out
Manual punch-in/out
Here’s how to perform manual punch-in/out.
Preparations
❒ Make input monitor settings
For the track on which you wish to punch-in/out, you will need to monitor the
track playback up to the punch-in point, and then monitor the input signal of the
track (the recording source) after you punch-in. To do this, set the input monitor
setting to “auto input monitor,” as explained below.
1. Press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.
Input monitor setting
2. In the INPUT MONITOR area, move the cursor to the AUTO button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The AUTO button will be turned on, and Auto Input Monitor will be selected as
the input monitor setting.
❒ Connect a foot switch
If you will be using a separately sold foot switch (Yamaha FC-5) to perform manual punch-in/out, connect the foot switch to the FOOT SW jack on the rear panel.
If a foot switch other than the Yamaha FC-5 is connected, it may not operate correctly.
128
— Operation Guide
Chapter7—Punch-in/out
Manual punch-in/out recording
1. Locate the song to a location earlier than where you wish to punch-in.
Tip!
If you set a locate point such as a marker or the A/B point at this location, it will be
convenient when you later check the recorded result or perform punch-in/out again.
For details on setting a locate point, refer to page 114.
2. Press the [REC TRACK SELECT] key for the track that you wish to record.
The [REC TRACK SELECT] key will blink, and the track will be in recordready mode.
3. Press the [PLAY] key. (If you are using a foot switch, press the foot
switch.)
The song will begin playing.
4. At the location where you wish to punch-in, hold down the [REC] key
and press the [PLAY] key (or press the foot switch).
The [REC] key will light, and recording will begin on the track you selected in
step 2.
5. At the location where you wish to punch-out, press the [PLAY] key (or
press the foot switch).
The [REC] key will go dark, and you will return to normal playback mode.
6. To stop the song, press the [STOP] key (or press the foot switch).
The song will stop.
7. To check the recorded result, locate to the location of step 1, and press
the [PLAY] key.
Tip!
If you make a mistake during punch-in/out recording, stop the transport and press
the [UNDO] key to cancel the previous recording and return the data to the state
before recording.
The following diagram shows the manual punch-in/out procedure.
1
2
3
16
Playback
PLAY
Record
REC
PLAY
Playback
PLAY
STOP
REC TRACK SELECT
2
Punch-in
Punch-out
— Operation Guide
129
Chapter7—Punch-in/out
Auto punch-in/out
Here’s how to use auto punch-in/out.
Preparations
❒ Make input monitor settings
To perform punch-in/out recording, you will need to select “auto input monitor”
as the input monitor setting. For details refer to page 128.
❒ Set the auto punch-in/out points
Specify the location at which punch-in/out will start (Auto Punch In point) and
end (Auto Punch Out Point). Auto punch-in/out uses the in/out point settings (→
P.120).
1. At the location where you wish to punch-in, hold down the [SET] key
and press the [IN] key.
The [IN] key will light, indicating that the In point has been set.
2. At the location where you wish to punch-out, hold down the [SET] key
and press the [OUT] key.
The [OUT] key will light, indicating that the Out point has been set.
Be aware that auto punch-in/out will not occur if the Out point is earlier than the
In point.
Tip!
The auto punch-in/out points (in/out points) can be precisely adjusted in milliseconds or in sub-frame units. For details refer to page 123.
❒ Set the pre-roll/post-roll times
When executing auto punch-in/out, you can specify intervals of playback before
the punch-in and after the punch-out. The playback before punch-in is called the
“pre-roll time,” and the playback after punch-out is called the “post-roll time.”
With the factory settings, these are set to five seconds, but you can change this as
desired. The beginning of the pre-roll is called the “pre-roll point,” and the end of
the post-roll is called the “post-roll point.”
Pre-roll
point
Auto punch-in
point
Pre-roll time
Song
130
— Operation Guide
Auto punch-out
point
Post-roll
point
Post-roll time
Chapter7—Punch-in/out
1. Press the [UTILITY] key → [F3] key.
Pre-roll/post-roll time
settings
2. Move the cursor to the pre-roll (PREROLL) or post-roll (POSTROLL) fields,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the pre-roll time and post-roll time.
Rehearsing and recording with auto punchin/out
❒ Rehearsing with auto punch-in/out
1. Press the [REC TRACK SELECT] key for the track that you wish to record
using auto punch-in/out.
The [REC TRACK SELECT] key will blink, and the track will be in record-ready
mode.
2. Make sure that the Locate section [IN]/[OUT] keys are lit, and press the
[AUTO PUNCH] key.
The [AUTO PUNCH] key will light, and you will locate to the pre-roll point.
While the [AUTO PUNCH] key is lit, transport/locate operations other than the
[STOP]/[PLAY]/[REC] keys cannot be used.
3. To begin rehearsing the auto punch-in/out, press the [PLAY] key.
1 The [PLAY] key will light, and playback will begin from the pre-roll point.
B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the [REC] key will begin blinking,
and the monitor signal of the track you selected in step 1 will change from the
track playback to the input signal (recording source). However, recording will
not actually occur.
C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the [REC] key will go dark, and
the monitor signal will return to the track playback. (During rehearsal, recording will not actually occur.)
D When you reach the post-roll point, the transport will locate to the pre-roll
point and stop.
— Operation Guide
131
Chapter7—Punch-in/out
4. If you wish to rehearse once again, press the [PLAY] key once again while
the transport is stopped.
Tip!
If you press the [REHEARSAL] key before or during rehearsal, operations 1–4 of
step 3 will continue repeating. (In this case, the A-B Repeat function will be
defeated.) To stop repeating the rehearsal, press the [REPEAT] key once again, or
press the [STOP] key.
❒ Recording with auto punch-in/out
5. To actually record using auto punch-in/out, stop the transport, and hold
down the [REC] key and press the [PLAY] key.
1 The [PLAY] key will light and the [REC] key will blink, then playback will
begin from the pre-roll point.
B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the [REC] key will light, and
recording will begin on the track you selected in step 1 (punch-in).
C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the [REC] key will blink, recording
will end, and playback will resume (punch-out).
D When you reach the post-roll point, the transport will locate to the pre-roll
point and stop.
6. If you wish to listen to the recorded result, press the [AUTO PUNCH] key
to make it go dark, and then press the [PLAY] key.
Tip!
If you make a mistake during auto punch-in/out recording, stop the transport and
press the [UNDO] key to cancel the previous recording and return the data to the
state before recording.
The following diagram shows the operating procedure for auto punch-in/out.
Pre-roll
point
Auto punch-in
point
Auto punch-out Post-roll
point
point
1
2
3
16
Locate
Playback
Rehearsal
Playback
Playback
Recording
Playback
REC TRACK SELECT
PLAY
AUTO
PUNCH
2
Rehearsal
REC
Actual recording
132
— Operation Guide
PLAY
8
Patching
This chapter explains how to patch the inputs and outputs, and how to use
the Quick Rec function to simultaneously record sixteen channels of input
sources.
Patching to the input channels
When the AW4416 is in the default state, input signals are patched to input channels 1–24 as shown in the following diagram. However, you can change the
input signals assigned to each input channel as necessary.
Input
patch
×8
INPUT jacks 1–8
I/O
card
I/O
card
OPTION I/O
slot 1
×8
OPTION I/O
slot 2
×8
Effect 1
Effect 2
×2
×2
Mixer section
Input channels 1–8
Input channels 9–16
Input channels 17–14
Return channel 1
Return channel 2
Here’s how to patch input signals to input channels 1–24 and return channels 1/
2.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key.
The display will show the SETUP screen Patch IN page, where you can patch signals to the input channels and recorder inputs. In this page, the MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN column shows the patched status of input channels 1–24
and return channels 1/2.
Tip!
If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the [F1] key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key to
switch the tabs, and then press the [F1] key.
— Operation Guide
133
Chapter8—Patching
1
2
1 Input channels 1–24
B Return channels 1/2
2. Move the cursor to the channel that you wish to patch, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the signal that you wish to assign.
The following signals can be assigned to each channel.
❍ Input channels 1–24
Display
Type of signal
AD 1 – AD 8
INPUT jacks 1–8
SL1-1 – SL1-8
INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
SL2-1 – SL2-8
INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
DIN L/DIN R
L/R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack
SMP 1 – SMP 8
Sampling pads 1–8
MET
Internal metronome
❍ Return channels 1/2
Display
Type of signal
EFF 1 L/R
Return from internal effect 1*1
EFF 2 L/R
Return from internal effect 2*2
AD 1/2 – AD 7/8
INPUT jacks 1/2–7/8
SL1-1/2 – SL1-7/8
INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
SL2-1/2 – SL2-7/8
INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
DIN L/R
DIGITAL STEREO IN jack (stereo)
*1. Selectable only for return 1
*2. Selectable only for return 2
Tip!
You can use the patch library to save the state of the patch settings you make. For
details refer to page 138.
134
— Operation Guide
Chapter8—Patching
Patching to the recorder inputs
When the AW4416 is in the default state, buses 1–8 are assigned respectively to
recorder inputs 1–8 and 9–16, but you can assign the direct signals from the
input channels as desired.
Mixer section
Recorder
input patch
Recorder section
×8
Buses 1–8
×8
Tracks 1–8
Tracks 9–16
Here’s how to assign the desired signals to recorder inputs 1–16.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key to access the SETUP screen
Patch IN page.
The RECORDER TRACK INPUT ASSIGN column will indicate the patched status
of recorder inputs 1–16.
Tip!
If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the [F1] key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key to
switch the tabs, and then press the [F1] key.
RECORDER
TRACK INPUT
ASSIGN column
2. Move the cursor to the recorder input whose patching you wish to
change, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the signal that you wish
to assign.
The following types of signal can be assigned to each input.
❍ Recorder inputs 1–16
Display
Type of signal
BUS 1 – BUS 8
Buses 1–8
DIR 1 – DIR16
Input channel direct out 1–16
— Operation Guide
135
Chapter8—Patching
Patching to the outputs
When the AW4416 is in the default state, the following signals are assigned to the
OMNI OUT jacks, STEREO OUT jacks, and digital I/O card outputs. If necessary,
you can change the output signals that are assigned to these output jacks.
Mixer section
Output
patch
AUX buses 1–4
Stereo output channel
×4
OMNI OUT jacks 1–4
×2
DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
×2
Buses 1–8
STEREO OUT jacks
×8
OPTION I/O
slot 1
×8
OPTION I/O
slot 2
I/O
card
I/O
card
Here’s how to assign the desired signal to each output jack.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F2] (Patch OUT) key.
The display will show the SETUP screen Patch OUT page. The various fields of
the display will show the patched status of each output jack.
Tip!
If the Patch OUT tab is not assigned to the [F2] key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key
to switch the tabs, and then press the [F2] key.
1
2
4
5
1 OMNI OUT jack 1–4
B DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
C STEREO OUT jack
D OUTPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
E OUTPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
136
— Operation Guide
3
Chapter8—Patching
2. Move the cursor to the output jack whose patching you wish to change,
and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the signal that you wish to assign.
The following types of signal can be assigned to each output jack.
❍ OMNI OUT jacks 1–4
Display
Type of signal
AUX 1 – AUX 8
AUX buses 1–8
RDR 1 – RDR16
Recorder direct out 1–16
ST L/ST R
L/R channels of the stereo output channel
BUS 1 – BUS 8
Buses 1–8
DIR 1 – DIR16
Input channel direct out 1–16
❍ DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
❍ STEREO OUT jacks
Display
Type of signal
ST L/R
Stereo output channel
BUS 1/2 – BUS 7/8
Buses 1/2–7/8
DIR 1/2 – DIR15/16
Input channel direct out 1/2–15/16
AUX 1/2 – AUX 7/8
AUX buses 1/2–7/8
RDR 1/2 – RDR15/16
Recorder direct out 1/2–15/16
❍ Digital I/O card (slot 1) OUTPUT 1–8
❍ Digital I/O card (slot 2) OUTPUT 1–8
Display
Type of signal
BUS 1 – BUS 8
Buses 1–8
DIR 1 – DIR16
Input channel direct out 1–16
AUX 1 – AUX 8
AUX buses 1–8
RDR 1 – RDR16
Recorder direct out 1–16
ST L/ST R
L/R channels of the stereo output channel
Tip!
When selecting a signal for assignment to an output jack, selections beginning with
“I-” such as “I-I8” or “I-M16” may be displayed in gray. Selections beginning with
“I-” indicate insert-out points of each channel. The gray display indicates that this
insert point is invalid. (For details on insert I/O patching, refer to page 140.)
— Operation Guide
137
Chapter8—Patching
Patch library
Patch settings that you make in the SETUP screen Patch IN page and Patch OUT
page can be stored in the patch library as one of twenty patch programs. The contents of the patch library are saved on the internal hard disk as part of the song.
Here’s how to use the patch library.
❒ Storing to the patch library
Here’s how to assign a name to your patch settings, and store them in the patch
library.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F3] (Patch Lib) key.
The display will show the PATCH screen Patch Lib page. The list in the lower part
of the display shows the contents of the patch library.
Tip!
• If the Patch Lib tab is not assigned to the [F3] key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1]
key to switch the tabs, and then press the [F3] key.
• Patch library numbers in which no data has been stored will be displayed with
a title of “[No Data!]”.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the patch library number (01–20) in
which you will store the settings.
Tip!
Patch library number 00 contains a preset patch program (recall-only) that returns
all patch settings to the initial state. For this reason, your settings cannot be stored in
patch number 00.
3. Move the cursor to the STORE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the
patch program.
4. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys and the [ENTER] key to specify
the name for the patch program.
For details on inputting characters, refer to page 60.
138
— Operation Guide
Chapter8—Patching
Tip!
You can also write the patch program directly, without accessing the TITLE EDIT
popup window. To do so, turn off the STORE CONFIRMATION setting in the UTILITY screen Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key → [F2] key). In this case, your settings will
be saved in a library named “New Data” when you execute step 3.
5. To execute the Store operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel without storing, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
❒ Recalling a patch program
Here’s how to recall a patch program that you saved in the patch library.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F3] (Patch Lib) key to access the SETUP screen
Patch Lib page.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the patch program that you wish to
recall.
3. Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
Tip!
You can also recall the patch program directly, bypassing the confirmation popup
window. To do so, turn off the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting in the UTILITY
screen Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key → [F2] key).
4. To execute the Recall, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel without recalling, move the cursor to the CANCEL button
and press the [ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
139
Chapter8—Patching
Patching input/output jacks to an
insert I/O point
You can patch various input/output jacks to the insert I/O point of a channel. This
patching method allows you to apply an external effect to a monitor channel during mixdown.
1. Use the MIXING LAYER section keys and the [SEL] keys to select the
channel whose insert I/O point you wish to patch to input/output jacks.
2. Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key.
The display will show the VIEW screen CH View page. In the example shown
here, monitor channel 1 is selected.
EFFECT INSERT
field
3. Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button of the EFFECT INSERT field, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window will appear. The SEND and RTN. fields
of the popup window will respectively show the types of output jack and input
jack that are patched.
4. Move the cursor to the EXTERNAL button and press the [ENTER] key.
140
— Operation Guide
Chapter8—Patching
5. Move the cursor to the SEND field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
the insert send jack.
You can select from the following jacks.
❍ When selecting for an input channel 1–24 or a monitor channel 1–16
Display
Jack
OMNI 1 – OMNI 4
OMNI OUT jacks 1–4
SL1-1 – SL1-8
OUTPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
SL2-1 – SL2-8
OUTPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
L*1
L channel of the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
D STO R*2
R channel of the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack
D STO
L*1
L channel of the STEREO OUT jack
STOUT R*2
R channel of the STEREO OUT jack
STOUT
*1. Selectable only for odd-numbered channels
*2. Selectable only for even-numbered channels
❍ When selecting for a return channel 1/2 or the stereo output channel
Display
Jack
OMNI 1/2 – OMNI 3/4
OMNI OUT jacks 1/2–3/4
SL1-1/2 – SL1-7/8
OUTPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
SL2-1/2 – SL2-7/8
OUTPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
D STOUT
DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack (L/R)
STOUT
STEREO OUT jack (L/R)
6. Move the cursor to the RTN. field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select
the inert return jack.
You can select from the following jacks.
❍ When selecting for an input channel 1–24 or monitor channel 1–16
Display
Jack
AD 1 – AD 8
INPUT jacks 1–8
SL1-1 – SL1-8
INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
SL2-1 – SL2-8
INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
D STIN L/D STIN R
L/R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack
❍ When selecting for a return channel 1/2 or the stereo output channel
Display
Jack
AD 1/2 – AD 7/8
INPUT jacks 1/2–7/8
SL1-1/2 – SL1-7/8
INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
SL2-1/2 – SL2-7/8
INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
D ST L/R
DIGITAL STEREO IN jack (L/R)
— Operation Guide
141
Chapter8—Patching
7. When you have finished making patching settings, move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The EFFECT INSERT field will indicate “ON [EXTERNAL] ,” indicating that the
selected input/output jacks have been patched to the insert I/O point.
Tip!
To defeat the patching of an insert I/O point, use the ASSIGN button of the EFFECT
INSERT field to access the EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window, turn on the OFF
button, and select the OK button.
The procedure described above can be made for multiple channels. However, it
is not possible for multiple insert sends to share the same output jack.
8. Press the [SETUP] key → [F2] (Patch OUT) key.
The display will show the SETUP screen Patch OUT page. Notice that OMNI
OUT ASSIGN field 4 shows “I-M 1”. This means that OMNI OUT jack 4 is being
used as an insert send jack for monitor channel 1.
• In this case, changing the patching of OMNI OUT jack 4 in the Patch OUT
page will defeat the insert I/O patching as well.
• If you wish to save the patching and insert I/O point settings that you made
here, you must store the current settings in a scene memory (not in the patch
library or channel library).
• The patch library cannot store insert I/O point settings. (When a patch program
is recalled from the patch library, the insert I/O points of all channels will be
reset to “OFF.”)
• Patching information cannot be stored in the channel library.
142
— Operation Guide
Chapter8—Patching
Using the Quick Rec function
Quick Rec is a function that rapidly makes the appropriate settings so that you
can simultaneously record sixteen input sources to audio tracks 1–16. When you
execute Quick Rec, groups of eight input sources will be assigned directly to
tracks 1–16, and input patch and mix parameter settings will also be reset. All
that remains for you to do is to press the [REC] key + [PLAY] key, and you will be
ready to record sixteen tracks simultaneously. This is convenient when you wish
to transfer multiple tracks from an external MTR to the AW4416.
Here we will explain the procedure by which the input signals from I/O cards
installed in slots 1 and 2 can be recorded simultaneously on tracks 1–16.
Tip!
When you execute Quick Rec, patching settings and mix parameters will be reset. If
you will need to reproduce the current patching or mix settings, we recommend
that you store the current scene into a scene memory before you execute Quick
Rec. (→ P.211)
1. Press the [QUICK REC] key.
The display will show the QUICK REC screen.
1
2
1 Input jacks sent to track 1–8 inputs
B Input jacks sent to track 9–16 inputs
2. Move the cursor to fields 1/2 in the above screen, and use the [DATA/
JOG] dial to select the input jacks that will be sent to the inputs of tracks
1–8/9–16.
You can select from the following choices. For this example, we will select
“SLOT1 1–8” for tracks 1–8, and “SLOT2 1–8” for tracks 9–16.
• ANALOG 1–8 ..... INPUT jacks 1–8
• SLOT1 1–8 ......... INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 1)
• SLOT2 1–8 ......... INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (slot 2)
— Operation Guide
143
Chapter8—Patching
3. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower right of the display,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm execution of Quick Rec.
4. To execute the Quick Rec settings, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
All [REC TRACK SELECT] keys will blink, and the input patch settings and mix
parameters of each channel will be reset. At this time, the signal flow will be as
follows.
I/O
card
I/O
card
OPTION I/O
slot 1
×8
Input
patch
OPTION I/O
slot 2
×8
Mixer section
Recorder
Input
patch Recorder section
Input channels 1–8
Tracks 1–8
Input channels 9–16
Tracks 9–16
Tip!
• If you decide to cancel without executing Quick Rec, move the cursor to the
CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
• At this time, you can also turn off the blinking [REC TRACK SELECT] buttons to
limit the number of recording tracks, or re-adjust the mix parameters and input
patch settings of each channel.
5. Press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.
The display will show the TRACK screen TR View page. As you can see from the
display shown below, executing Quick Rec will turn input monitor on (I field= ●)
for all tracks, and will mute (M field= ●) all tracks.
144
— Operation Guide
Chapter8—Patching
6. Play back the audio source connected to the input jacks of the I/O cards
(slots 1/2).
The levels of the signals sent from the I/O card INPUT to tracks 1–16 (i.e., recording levels) will be displayed in the level meter/counter.
7. As necessary, use the faders of input channels 1–16 to adjust the recording level of tracks 1–16.
The faders of input channels 1–16 will be reset to nominal level (0 dB) when
Quick Rec is executed. Adjust the recording level if necessary.
If you wish to use the faders to adjust the recording level, the POST FADER button must be turned on in the DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION field of the
UTILITY screen → Prefer.1 page.
8. When you finish recording on the AW4416, press the [ALL SAFE] key.
Record-ready and mute status will be canceled for all tracks.
— Operation Guide
145
9
Track and virtual track
operations
This chapter explains the track structure of the recorder section, and how
to perform editing and other operations.
The track structure of the AW4416
The recorder section of the AW4416 handles three types of tracks: audio tracks,
virtual tracks, and the stereo track.
❍ Audio tracks
These are physical tracks that are used for actual recording and playback, and are
also referred to simply as “tracks.” When the AW4416 is in its initial state, the
output of buses 1–8 is patched to the inputs of tracks 1–8/9–16, and the output of
tracks 1–16 is patched to monitor channels 1–16. This allows a maximum of 16
tracks to be recorded simultaneously.
However, the number of tracks that can be played back simultaneously is limited
by the number of tracks that are being recorded simultaneously. Be aware that
tracks will automatically be muted depending on the number of simultaneously
recorded tracks. The tables below show the numbers of tracks that can be
recorded simultaneously and played back simultaneously, and the number of
tracks that will be muted in each case.
• 16 bit song
Simultaneously
recordable tracks
Simultaneously
playable tracks
Automatically muted
tracks
0–8
16
0
9–16
0
16
Simultaneously
recordable tracks
Simultaneously
playable tracks
Automatically muted
tracks
0
16
0
1–2
14
2
3–4
12
4
5–8
8
8
9–16
0
16
• 24 bit song
For example if you simultaneously record nine or more tracks in a 16 bit song, no
tracks can be played back simultaneously, meaning that the moment you put the
ninth track in record-ready mode (the instant you turn on the ninth [REC TRACK
SELECT] key), tracks 1–16 will all be muted automatically.
— Operation Guide
147
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
To defeat muting of tracks 1–16, you must first reduce the number of recordready tracks to eight tracks or fewer, and then use the TRACK screen TR View
page ([TRACK] key → [F1] key) to manually un-mute each track. (For details refer
to Reference Guide “TRACK screen.”)
By pressing the [ALL SAFE] button in the level meter/counter section, you can
cancel record-ready/mute status for all tracks at once. It is convenient to use this
method as a shortcut when you wish to quickly cancel the mute settings and redo the settings.
❍ Virtual tracks
These are “virtual” tracks from which you can select. On the AW4416, recording
and playback will occur on the virtual track 1–8 that you select for each audio
track 1–16.
The following diagram shows the concept of virtual tracks. The horizontal rows
represent audio tracks 1–16, and the vertical columns represent virtual tracks 1–
8. The shaded areas indicate the virtual tracks that are currently selected for
recording and playback.
Audio tracks
1
Virtual tracks
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For example if you are recording a solo part on a certain track, you can switch
virtual tracks to record multiple takes, and select the best take later.
Tip!
In the initial state of the AW4416, virtual track 1 is selected for all tracks.
❍ Stereo track
This is a stereo track that is independent of the audio tracks, and is used mainly as
a master track to create a two-track mix. The AW4416 provides one stereo track
for each song.
The input of the stereo track is internally connected to the stereo bus, so that you
can record the signal of the stereo bus at any time simply by putting the stereo
track in record mode. At this time, recording on the normal audio tracks 1–16
will not be possible. These tracks will only play back.
When you play back the stereo track, the output of the stereo track is automatically assigned to monitor channels 1/2. At this time, all of the normal audio tracks
will be muted.
148
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
Switching virtual tracks
Here’s how to switch the virtual track that a specific track will use.
1. Press the [TRACK] key → [F2] key.
The TRACK screen V.Track page will appear in the display.
2
1
3
This page shows the following information.
1 Track number
These are the track numbers 1–16.
B Track name
These are the names assigned to the virtual track currently selected for each track.
By default, virtual tracks that have already been recorded will be named “V.Tr xy” (“x” will be a track number 1–16, and “y” will be a virtual track number 1–8).
This name can be changed later as desired (→ P.153). Virtual tracks that have not
yet been recorded will be displayed as “-NO REC-”.
C Virtual track
The highlighted number is the virtual track number currently selected for track 1–
16. In the screen shown above, virtual track 1 is assigned to all tracks 1–16
(default setting).
Of the currently selected virtual tracks, the numbers of tracks that have already
been recorded will be enclosed by a square; e.g.,
.
— Operation Guide
149
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
2. Move the cursor to the virtual track number that you wish to assign to
track 1, and press the [ENTER] key.
The virtual track number you select will be highlighted. Now you can record and
play back the newly selected virtual track without affecting the previous virtual
track.
150
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
Pairing tracks
Adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered tracks (tracks 1/2, tracks 3/4 ... tracks
15/16) can be set as a stereo pair. Paired tracks will always operate in tandem,
such as when tracks are selected for editing, or when you switch virtual tracks.
For example if you pair two tracks on which a stereo source was recorded, both
tracks can be processed by a single operation, for greater convenience.
Even if tracks are paired, this will not affect the pairing settings of the monitor
channels. If necessary, you can make separate settings to pair the monitor channels of these tracks as well.
1. Press the [TRACK] key → [F2] key.
The TRACK screen V.Track page will appear. The heart symbols in the left of the
display indicate the current pairing status. Paired tracks are connected by a heart
symbol.
2. To create a pair, move the cursor to the corresponding heart symbol
( ), and press the [ENTER] key.
The heart symbol will be connected, and the two tracks will be paired. To cancel
pairing, move the cursor to the heart symbol once again, and press the [ENTER]
key.
— Operation Guide
151
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
Editing tracks and virtual tracks
A variety of editing operations can be performed on the audio data recorded on
tracks 1–16 of the AW4416, such as copying data between tracks, moving data to
an earlier or later location within the same track, or changing the pitch. In the
same way, you can also copy or move data between the virtual tracks 1–8 that are
included in each track. The following pages explain how to edit tracks and virtual
tracks.
Tracks, parts, and regions
Track and virtual track editing can be performed in three editing units.
❍ Track
The entire currently selected track (1–16) or virtual track (1–8) will be affected by
the editing operation. When editing in units of a track, tracks that contain no
audio data cannot be selected.
❍ Part
Within the currently selected track (1–16) or virtual track (1–8), the currently
selected range is called the “part.” Unlike the case when editing tracks, portions
that contain no audio data can be selected as a part.
❍ Region
A continuous piece of audio that was recorded on a track in a single operation is
called a “region.” When editing in units of a region, portions that contain no
audio data cannot be selected.
Region
Track 1
Track
Track 2
Track 3
Part
= Continuous audio data
Tip!
It is possible for a single track or a single part to include multiple regions.
152
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
Naming a virtual track or region
When you record something on a track, the following default name will be
assigned to that virtual track.
• Default virtual track name .. V.Tr x-y (x=track number, y=virtual track number)
• Default region name ........... VTxy (x=track number, y=virtual track number)
If multiple regions exist in the same track (i.e., if you recorded the track in more
than one stage), all the default region names will be the same.
These track names and region names can be modified using the following procedure.
❒ Naming a virtual track
1. In the RECORDER section, press the [EDIT] key → [F1] key.
The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the TRACK menu and press the [ENTER] key.
The TRACK menu will show the available editing commands.
Editing
commands
— Operation Guide
153
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
3. Move the cursor to the NAME menu and press the [ENTER] key.
Buttons to specify NAME menu options will appear.
4. Move the cursor to the TRACK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the area at the bottom of the screen.
5. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the track that you wish to name, and
press the [ENTER] key.
154
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
6. Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the [ENTER] key.
A NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the
track/region.
7. When you have finished inputting the name, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on inputting characters,
refer to page 60.)
You will return to the screen of step 1.
Tip!
You can assign a track name of up to 16 characters. In the TRACK screen etc., the
first eight characters of the name will be displayed.
❒ Naming a region
1. In the RECORDER section, press the [EDIT] key → [F1] key.
The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the REGION menu and press the [ENTER] key.
The REGION menu will show the available editing commands.
Editing
commands
3. Move the cursor to the NAME menu and press the [ENTER] key.
Buttons to specify NAME menu options will appear.
4. Move the cursor to the REGION button and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the area at the bottom of the screen.
— Operation Guide
155
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
5. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to select the region that you
wish to name, and press the [ENTER] key.
6. Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the [ENTER] key.
A NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the
region.
7. When you have finished inputting the name, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on inputting characters,
refer to page 60.)
You will return to the screen of step 1.
Tip!
You can assign a region name of up to 8 characters.
Track editing procedure
Here’s the basic procedure for editing tracks, parts, or regions for audio tracks 1–
16.
1. In the RECORDER section, press the [EDIT] key → [F1] key.
The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear.
21 3
4
5
6
This screen shows the following information.
1 Track number
This is the track number 1–16.
B Pair
This shows the pairing status for adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered
tracks. Pairing can also be set or defeated in this screen.
C Track name
This is the name assigned to each virtual track.
D Bar graph
Bar graphs indicate the presence or absence of audio data for each track.
156
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
E TRACK/PART/REGION menus
These respectively access editing commands for editing entire tracks, parts, or
regions. Move the cursor to the desired menu, and press the [ENTER] key to view
the list of editing commands.
F Parameter setting area
In this area you can make the necessary parameter settings when executing the
editing command.
2. According to the smallest unit (track/part/region) that you wish to edit,
move the cursor to the TRACK, PART, or REGION menu and press the
[ENTER] key.
The selected menu of editing commands will appear. The following screen shows
the commands that appear when the TRACK menu is selected.
3. Move the cursor to the desired editing command and press the [ENTER]
key.
Buttons to set the parameters for the selected editing command will appear. The
screen shown below is an example of when the TRACK menu COPY command is
selected.
Tip!
Page 161 provides brief explanations of the editing commands of each menu. For
details of each command, refer to the Reference Guide.
— Operation Guide
157
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
4. To change the parameter settings, move the cursor to the corresponding button.
The lower part of the display will show the settings of the parameter at which the
cursor is currently located.
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the setting area in the lower part of the display. The
screen shown below is an example of when the COPY command is selected.
6. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to modify the parameter value, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The cursor will return to the button selected in step 4.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel without executing the editing command, move the cursor
from here to a button at a higher level, and press the [ENTER] key.
7. Repeat steps 4–6 to make settings for the remaining parameters.
158
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
8. To execute the editing command, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The editing command you selected in step 3 will be executed.
Tip!
• If you wish to halt the editing operation, move the cursor to a button in the top
level, and press the [ENTER] key.
• As exceptions, the TRACK menu NAME command and the REGION menu
NAME command do not require you to use the EXECUTE button.
• Even after executing an editing command, you can use the [UNDO] button to
cancel the results of the operation. (The TRACK menu NAME command and
the REGION menu NAME command are exceptions to this.)
Virtual track editing procedure
Here’s the basic procedure for editing entire tracks, parts, or regions for virtual
tracks 1–8 of the desired track.
1. In the RECORDER section, press the [EDIT] key → [F2] key.
The EDIT screen V.TR Edit page will appear, where you can edit virtual tracks.
2
1
3
4
5
6
This screen shows the following information.
1 Track number
This is the track number (1–16) currently selected for editing.
If this track is paired, a heart symbol and the other track of the pair will be displayed.
B Virtual track number
This is the virtual track number 1–8.
C Track name
This is the name assigned to the virtual track.
D Bar graph
Bar graphs indicate the presence or absence of audio data for each virtual track.
— Operation Guide
159
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
E TRACK/PART/REGION menus
These respectively access editing commands for editing entire tracks, parts, or
regions. Move the cursor to the desired menu, and press the [ENTER] key to view
the list of editing commands.
F Parameter setting area
In this area you can make the necessary parameter settings when executing the
editing command.
2. Move the cursor to the track number area and use the [DATA/JOG] dial
to select the track (1–16) that you wish to edit.
When you switch tracks, the track names and bar graph display of virtual tracks
1–8 will change accordingly.
3. According to the smallest unit (entire virtual track/part/region) that you
wish to edit, move the cursor to the TRACK, PART, or REGION menu and
press the [ENTER] key.
The selected menu of editing commands will appear.
Tip!
Page 161 provides brief explanations of the editing commands of each menu. For
details of each command, refer to the Reference Guide.
4. Move the cursor to the desired editing command and press the [ENTER]
key.
Buttons to set the parameters for the selected editing command will appear.
5. To change the parameter settings, move the cursor to the corresponding button.
The lower part of the display will show the settings of the parameter at which the
cursor is currently located.
6. Press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the setting area in the lower part of the display.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel without executing the editing command, move the cursor
from here to a button at a higher level, and press the [ENTER] key.
7. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to modify the parameter value, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The cursor will return to the button selected in step 4.
8. Repeat steps 5–7 to make settings for the remaining parameters.
160
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
9. To execute the editing command, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The editing command you selected in step 4 will be executed.
Tip!
• If you wish to halt the editing operation, move the cursor to a button in the top
level, and press the [ENTER] key.
• As exceptions, the TRACK menu NAME command and the REGION menu
NAME command do not require you to use the EXECUTE button.
• Even after executing an editing command, you can use the [UNDO] button to
cancel the results of the operation. (The TRACK menu NAME command and
the REGION menu NAME command are exceptions to this.)
Editing command list
This section provides brief explanations for the editing commands of the TRACK/
PART/REGION menus for tracks and virtual tracks. Details and parameters for
each command are given in the Reference Guide.
TRACK menu
These commands edit entire tracks or entire virtual tracks.
❍ NAME (Track Name)
Assign a name to an already-recorded virtual track.
❍ ERASE
Erase the audio data of the selected track.
❍ COPY
Copy the audio data of the selected track to another track. The Fr.Track (From
Track) parameter specifies the copy source track, and the To Track parameter
specifies the copy destination track.
❍ EXCHG (Exchange)
Exchange the audio data of two selected tracks. The Fr.Track (From Track) and To
Track parameters specify the tracks to be exchanged.
❍ SLIP
Move all audio data of the selected track forward or backward. The SLIP parameter specifies the distance of the movement (maximum ±5 hours).
❍ T-COMP (Time Compression/Expansion)
Compress or expand the length of the audio data in the selected track without
affecting the pitch. The RATIO parameter specifies the amount of compression or
expansion (50%–200%).
❍ PITCH (Pitch Change)
Change only the pitch without affecting the length of the audio data. The PITCH
parameter specifies the change in semitones (maximum ±12 semitones) and the
FINE parameter specifies the change in one-cent steps (maximum ±50 cents).
— Operation Guide
161
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
PART menu
These commands edit data in units of parts. When using these commands, you
will need to specify not only the track for editing, but also the editing start location (START) and end location (END).
❍ ERASE
Erase the audio data of the selected part. Audio data following that part will not
be affected.
❍ DELETE
Delete the audio data of the selected part. Audio data following that part will
move forward by the length of the deleted data.
❍ COPY
Copy the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified
track. You can also specify the number of times the data will be copied, and the
interval between copies. If audio data exists at the destination, you can specify
whether the copied data will be inserted or overwritten.
❍ MOVE
Move the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified
track. At this time, the audio data of the move source will be erased. If audio data
exists at the destination, you can specify whether the moved data will be inserted
or overwritten.
❍ INSERT
Insert silence into the selected part. Audio data following that part will move
backward by the length of the inserted data.
❍ T-COMP (Time Compression/Expansion)
Compress or expand the length of the audio data in the selected track without
affecting the pitch. The RATIO parameter specifies the amount of compression or
expansion (50%–200%).
❍ PITCH (Pitch Change)
Change only the pitch without affecting the length of the audio data of the
selected part. The PITCH parameter specifies the change in semitones (maximum
±12 semitones) and the FINE parameter specifies the change in one-cent steps
(maximum ±50 cents).
162
— Operation Guide
Chapter9—Track and virtual track operations
REGION menu
These commands edit data in units of regions.
❍ NAME
Assign a name to a region.
❍ ERASE
Erase the selected region. Audio data following that region will not be affected.
❍ DELETE
Delete the selected region. Audio data following that region will move forward
by the length of the deleted data.
❍ COPY
Copy the selected region to the specified location of the specified track. You can
also specify the number of times the data will be copied, and the interval
between copies. If audio data exists at the copy destination, you can specify
whether the copied data will be inserted or overwritten.
❍ MOVE
Move the selected region to the specified location of the specified track. At this
time, the move source region will be erased. If audio data exists at the move destination, you can specify whether the moved data will be inserted or overwritten.
❍ DIVIDE
Divide the selected region into two at the location you specify.
❍ TRIM IN
Trim the starting location of the selected region toward the end in sample units.
❍ TRIM OUT
Trim the ending location of the selected region toward the beginning in sample
units.
❍ T-COMP (Time Compression/Expansion)
Compress or expand the length of the audio data in the selected track without
affecting the pitch. The RATIO parameter specifies the amount of compression or
expansion (50%–200%).
❍ PITCH (Pitch Change)
Change only the pitch without affecting the length of the audio data of the
selected region. The PITCH parameter specifies the change in semitones (maximum ±12 semitones) and the FINE parameter specifies the change in one-cent
steps (maximum ±50 cents).
— Operation Guide
163
10
Internal effects
This chapter explains the two built-in effects of the AW4416.
About the internal effects
The AW4416 contains two multi-effect units (respectively called “effect 1” and
“effect 2”). In general, the internal effects can be used in the following two ways.
❒ Using AUX send/return
In this method, the two AUX sends are used to send signals from each channel to
the inputs of effects 1/2, and the outputs of effects 1/2 are mixed with the signals
of the stereo bus or buses 1–8. When the AW4416 is in the default state, AUX
send 7/8 are patched to the inputs of effects 1/2, and the outputs of effects 1/2 are
patched to return channels 1/2.
The signals sent from input channels 1–24 and monitor channels 1–16 to AUX
buses 7/8 are input to effects 1/2 respectively. For each channel, you can adjust
the AUX 7/8 send levels and switch between pre- or post-fader.
The output signals from effects 1/2 are sent to return channels 1/2. By routing the
return channels to buses 1–8 or the stereo bus, they can be mixed with the original sound of each channel.
❒ Inserting an effect into a channel
If you defeat the assignment of effect 1/2 to AUX send 7/8, you can insert an
effect into the desired channel (immediately before the attenuator). In this case,
the mixed effect and direct signals will be input to the corresponding channel. An
effect that is used for insertion cannot be inserted into another channel, or used
via send/return.
Effects can be inserted into the following channels.
• Input channels 1–24
• Monitor channels 1–16
• Return channels 1/2
• Stereo output channel
— Operation Guide
165
Chapter10—Internal effects
Using AUX send/return to apply an
effect
As an example of using an effect with AUX send/return, here’s how to apply effect
1 via AUX bus 7.
❒ Patching
Make sure that the AUX send/return patching for effect 1 is appropriate.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key.
The SETUP screen Patch IN page will appear.
If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the [F1] key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key
to switch the tab, and then press the [F1] key.
2. Make sure that the EFFECT PATCH parameter EFF1 is set to “AUX 7.”
The EFFECT PATCH parameters select whether effects 1/2 will be used via AUX or
inserted into a specific channel. By default, EFF1 (effect 1) is assigned to AUX 7
and EFF2 (effect 2) is assigned to AUX 8, as shown above.
Tip!
If EFF1 is set to “INSERT,” move the cursor to the “INSERT” field and use the [DATA/
JOG] dial to change it to “AUX 7.” Then move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
3. Make sure that the MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN parameter RTN1 is
set to “EFF1 L/R.”
The MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN area switches the signal that is assigned to
the input channel/return channel of the mixer. By default, “EFF1 L/R” (L/R output
of effect 1) is assigned to RTN1 (return channel 1).
Tip!
If RTN1 has been changed to another setting, move the cursor to the setting area,
and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to change the setting to “EFF 1 L/R.”
166
— Operation Guide
Chapter10—Internal effects
❒ Recalling an effect program from the library
The AW4416 provides 41 effect types such as Reverb Hall, Gate Reverb, and Stereo Delay. The effect type library contains factory-set effect programs that use
these effect types. Here’s how to recall an effect program of the effect type you
wish to use.
1. Press the [AUX 7] key → [F2] key.
The AUX7/EFF1 screen Library page will appear. A list of effect programs will be
displayed.
Tip!
• In general, the effect library is common to both effects 1 and 2. However,
effect program no. 19 “HQ-Pitch” can be used only by effect 2.
• Effect library 001–041 contain read-only effect programs using the corresponding effect type.
• It is not possible to change the effect type of the currently used effect program.
For this reason, you must load a program that uses the desired effect type from
the library even if you wish to create an effect program from scratch.
2. Move the cursor to the list, and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
program that you wish to recall.
When you select a program, the effect type used by that program will be displayed at the right of the list. For this example, let’s select the room reverb program “Reverb Room.”
— Operation Guide
167
Chapter10—Internal effects
3. Move the cursor to the RECALL button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the recall operation.
Tip!
It is also possible to recall the effect program directly, without displaying the popup
window that asks you to confirm the recall operation. To do so, access the UTILITY
screen Pref. 1 page ([UTILITY] key → [F2] key), and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION
off.
4. To recall the program, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The effect program will be recalled. The name of the recalled program will
appear in the “CURRENT EFFECT NAME” area in the upper left of the display.
5. Press the [F1] key.
The Eff.Edit page will appear in the display.
6. Make sure that the MIX BAL knob located in the lower right of the display is set to 100%.
The Eff.Edit page allows you to edit the effect parameters. Regardless of the effect
type that is selected, the MIX BAL (a parameter that adjusts the balance between
the dry and effect sounds) knob will be located in the lower right of the Eff.Edit
page.
When using an effect via AUX send/return, you will need to set this parameter to
100% so that the effect will output only the “wet” (processed) sound. To adjust
this setting, move the cursor to the MIX BAL knob, and rotate the [DATA/JOG]
dial.
Tip!
• Other effect parameters can be edited in the same way by moving the cursor to
them and rotating the [DATA/JOG] dial.
• For the type and function of the effect parameters of each effect type, refer to
the Reference Guide.
168
— Operation Guide
Chapter10—Internal effects
❒ Switching between pre-fader and post-fader
For each monitor channel, you can select the location (pre-fader or post-fader)
from which the signal will be sent to AUX 7.
1. Press the [AUX 7] → [F4] key.
The Pre/PstMON page will appear, where you can make pre-/post-fader settings
for monitor channels 1–16.
Tip!
When the AW4416 is in the initial state, this will be set to post-fader.
2. To switch a specific channel between pre-fader (PRE) and post-fader
(POST), move the cursor to the button for that channel and press the
[ENTER] key.
Tip!
To switch all monitor channels between pre-fader/post-fader, move the cursor to the
PRE/POST button in the GBL (global) section at the right of the display, and press the
[ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
169
Chapter10—Internal effects
❒ Adjusting the send level/return level
Here’s how to adjust the send level for each monitor channel, and the return level
of the return channel.
1. Press the [HOME] key → [17-24 RTN] key.
[SEL] keys 15/16, [ON] keys 15/16, and faders 15/16 will be assigned to return
channels 1/2. At this time, faders 15/16 will adjust the input level of the return
signals from effects 1/2.
Tip!
When the AW4416 is in the initial state, the faders of return channels 1/2 will be set
to nominal level (0 dB).
2. Press the [VIEW] key → [SEL] key 15.
The VIEW screen of return channel 1 will appear in the display.
3. Make sure that the ST button of the PAN/ROUT area is on.
In this state, the return signal from effect 1 will be sent to the stereo bus and
mixed with the signals of the monitor channels.
Tip!
If the ST button is off, move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key.
❒ Adjusting the send level
1. Press the [AUX 7] key → [MONI] key.
[SEL] keys 1–16, [ON] keys 1–16, and faders 1–16 will be assigned to monitor
channels 1–16. At this time, faders 1–16 will adjust the send level of the signals
sent from monitor channels 1–16 to AUX 7 (effect 1).
2. While the song plays back, use faders 1–16 to adjust the send level of
each monitor channel.
3. As necessary, press the [HOME] key → [17-24] RTN key, and use fader 15
to readjust the return level.
170
— Operation Guide
Chapter10—Internal effects
Inserting an effect into a desired
channel
If you defeat their assignment to AUX 7/8, the AW4416’s internal effects can be
inserted into a desired channel. As an example, here’s how effect 2 can be
inserted into monitor channel 1.
❒ Patching
Here’s how to release effect 2 from its assignment to AUX send 8, and use it as an
insertion effect.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key.
The SETUP screen Patch IN page will appear in the display.
If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the [F1] key, press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key
to switch the tab, and then press the [F1] key.
2. Move the cursor to the EFF2 parameter of the EFFECT PATCH area, and
rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm that you wish to disconnect
effect 2 from AUX bus 8 and use it for insertion.
3. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
In the EFFECT PATCH area, EFF2 will change to “INSERT.” Now the effect can be
inserted into the desired channel.
— Operation Guide
171
Chapter10—Internal effects
An effect that has been specified for insertion cannot again be used via AUX
send/return until you reassign it to the AUX bus in the EFFECT PATCH area.
If RTN 2 is set to “EFF 2 L/R” in the Patch IN page, performing this step will automatically cancel the assignment.
❒ Inserting an effect into monitor channel 1
1. Press [MONI] key → [SEL] key 1.
Monitor channel 1 will be selected.
2. Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key.
The VIEW screen CH View page will appear in the display.
3. Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button in the EFFECT INSERT area, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window will appear. In this popup window, you
can use the following four buttons to select the type of effect that will be inserted.
• OFF .....................Effect insertion will be cancelled.
• INT.EFF1 ..............Insert internal effect 1.
• INT.EFF2 ..............Insert internal effect 2.
• EXTERNAL ...........Insert an external effect.
The INT.EFF1 and INT.EFF2 buttons cannot be turned on if the respective internal
effect 1/2 has not been disconnected from AUX send.
172
— Operation Guide
Chapter10—Internal effects
4. To insert effect 2, move the cursor to the INT.EFF2 button and press the
[ENTER] key.
In the popup window, SEND will change to “EFF2,” and RTN. will change to “EFF
2L.” This indicates that the input of effect 2 has been patched to the insert send of
monitor channel 1, and the L output of effect 2 has been patched to the insert
return.
Tip!
• Regardless of the channel, the effect will be inserted at a position immediately
after the attenuator.
• If you move the cursor to the RTN. field and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial, you
can switch between “EFF 2L” and “EFF 2R.”
• If an effect is inserted into a stereo channel (return channels 1/2, stereo output
channel), the L/R outputs of the effect will be returned to the L/R of that channel.
5. When you have finished making settings in the EFF.INSERT SETTING
popup window, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The EFFECT INSERT field of the CH View page will be displayed as “ON
[INT.EFF2].” This indicates that effect 2 has been inserted into the corresponding
channel (in this case, monitor channel 1).
An effect that has been inserted into a channel will be usable only for that channel until you insert the same effect into a different channel or turn on the OFF
button in the EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window.
— Operation Guide
173
Chapter10—Internal effects
❒ Recalling an effect program
Here’s how you can recall the desired program for effect 2 from the effect library.
1. Press the [AUX 8] key → [F2] key.
The AUX8/EFF2 screen Library page will appear in the display.
2. Move the cursor to the list at the bottom of the display, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the effect program that you wish to recall.
3. Move the cursor to the RECALL button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The selected program will be recalled to effect 2.
4. Press the [F1] key.
The Eff.Edit page will appear.
5. As necessary, move the cursor to the MIX BAL. knob and rotate the
[DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the balance between the “wet” (processed)
and “dry” (unprocessed) sound.
Tip!
Immediately after an effect program is recalled, MIX BAL. will be reset to 100%
(only “wet” sound).
174
— Operation Guide
11
Song management
This chapter explains song management operations such as saving, loading, deleting, or copying songs.
About songs
On the AW4416, all the data necessary to reproduce a musical composition you
create (i.e., mixer settings, recorder settings, audio data, etc.) is saved in the internal hard disk as a “song.” By loading a song into internal memory, you can return
to the saved state at any time. A song includes the following data.
• Audio data for all virtual tracks
• TRACK screen settings (including locate point settings)
• Tempo map settings
• Scene memories
• Automix memory
• Patch library
• EQ library
• Dynamics library
• Channel library
• Data and settings for the Sampling Pad function
• Song name and comment
• Counter display method (SECOND/TIME CODE/MEASURE)
• Song Protect setting
• Time Code Top setting
• Region Fade Time setting
• Undo data
Tip!
• Multiple songs can be saved on the internal hard disk. However, only the single song currently being controlled on the AW4416 (the “current song”) can
be handled at any given time.
• When the power of the AW4416 is turned on, the most-recently saved song
will be loaded automatically.
Be aware that if you turn off the power of the AW4416 without saving the current
song, any changes in the current song will be lost. When you wish to turn off the
power of the AW4416, you must perform the shut-down procedure (→ P.17).
— Operation Guide
175
Chapter11—Song management
Song structure and size
Song structure
The following diagram shows the structure of songs saved on the hard disk.
As you can see from the diagram, each song consists of the following two areas.
■ Song
(maximum 6.4 GB per song)
■ System area
Various settings
Song name
Libraries
Scenes
Automix data
■ Data area
16 tracks × 8
Stereo track
Samples
Undo data
Hard disk
(maximum 64 GB/
30,000 songs)
■ CD production work area
Required when producing
an audio CD
(not allocated beforehand)
❍ System area
This area contains data for various
settings, the song name, libraries,
scenes, and automix data. The size of
the system area is fixed at approximately 2 MB.
❍ Audio area
This area contains audio data for the
audio tracks and stereo track, sample
data, and undo data. The size of the
audio area will depend on the size of
the recorded tracks and virtual tracks.
You can increase the available free
area by deleting the audio data of
unneeded tracks and then executing
the Song Optimize operation.
Usable hard disks/song capacity
The AW4416 can use a hard disk of up to 64 GB, and allows you to create a maximum of 30,000 songs. However, the size of each song (system area + data area)
is limited to a maximum of 6.4 GB.
• If you have used up the available space of a song or of the hard disk, you can
delete the audio data of unwanted tracks or virtual tracks (→ P.156), and execute the Song Optimize operation (→ P.182) to create more free space. (It is not
possible to increase the free space by performing other operations.)
• The song size (SIZE) displayed in the song list shows only the size of the data
area. Be aware that in actuality, each song also uses a system area of approximately 2 MB. On the AW4416, data sizes are displayed as 1 KB= 1,024 bytes.
Work area for audio CD production
When using an internal/external CD-R/RW drive to create an audio CD, you will
need at least as much work area on the hard disk as occupied by the audio data
being written to the CD. For example in order to create a 74 minute audio CD,
the internal hard disk must have sufficient free area to record a 74 minute or
longer 16 bit/44.1 kHz stereo track (approximately 650 MB).
To check the amount of free area on the internal hard disk, select a 16 bit/
44.1 kHz song, and press the REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key to put the stereo track
176
— Operation Guide
Chapter11—Song management
in record-ready mode. Then access the TRACK screen Stereo page ([TRACK] key
→ [F3] (Stereo) key), and hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [F1] (REMAIN)
key. The counter will show the REMAIN TIME (remaining time). For example if
you wish to create a 74 minute CD, make sure that the remaining time is at least
74 minutes.
If there is not enough free area on the hard disk, you must delete audio data for
unneeded tracks or virtual tracks (→ P.156), and then execute the Song Optimize
operation (→ P.182) to increase the free area. (It is not possible to increase the
free area by performing any other operation.)
Saving/loading a song
Here’s how to save the current song on the internal hard disk, and how to load a
song from the internal hard disk into the current song.
❒ Saving the current song
1. Press the [SONG] key → [F1] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear in the display. A list of information
on the songs currently saved on the internal hard disk will appear in the upper
part of the display. The current song will be highlighted in the list.
1
2
3
4
5
1 Song name
B Date and time when the song was saved
C Song size
D Song quantization/sampling frequency
E Song protect
2. To save the current song, move the cursor to the SAVE button in the
lower right of the screen and press the [ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
177
Chapter11—Song management
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm that you wish to save the
current song.
3. To execute the Save operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Tip!
• If you decide to cancel without saving, move the cursor to the CANCEL button
and press the [ENTER] key.
• If the free space on the internal hard disk is running low, execute the Song
Optimize operation (→ P.182). You can also back up desired songs on an external device such as CD-RW or MO (→ P.246).
❒ Loading a song
1. Press the [SONG] key → [F1] key.
The SONG screen Song List page will appear.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song that you wish to load. Then
move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you whether you wish to save the current
song first.
3. If you wish to save the current song before loading another song, move
the cursor to the YES button. If you wish to load the song without saving
the current song, move the cursor to the NO button. Then press the
[ENTER] key.
If you selected the YES button, the current song will be saved and then the
selected song will be loaded immediately. If you selected the NO button, any
changes to the current song will be discarded, and the selected song will be
loaded.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel the Load operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button
and press the [ENTER] key.
178
— Operation Guide
Chapter11—Song management
Editing the song name/comment
When you create a new song, a default song name “xxxx - NEW SONG -” (xxxxx
will be a serial number) will be assigned unless you specify otherwise, and the
comment will be “No Description”. You can edit the song name and comment
afterward.
1. Press the [SONG] key → [F2] key.
The SONG screen Setting page will appear.
The SONG NAME field in the upper part of the screen will show the song name
of the current song, and the COMMENT field will show the comment. (If no comment has been assigned, this will be displayed as “No Description.”)
2. To edit the song name, move the cursor to the NAME EDIT button in the
upper left of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the song.
3. Use the character palette to modify the name. Then move the cursor to
the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on inputting characters, refer to page 60.)
You will return to the SONG screen Setting page.
4. To edit the comment, move the cursor to the COMMENT EDIT button in
the upper left of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The COMMENT EDIT window will appear, allowing you to assign a comment to
the song.
5. Use the character palette to modify the comment. Then move the cursor
to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on inputting
characters, refer to page 60.)
You will return to the SONG screen Setting page.
Simply modifying the song name in this page will not change the song name
shown in the list of the SONG screen Song List page. The new name will be
reflected in the list when you save the current song.
— Operation Guide
179
Chapter11—Song management
Deleting/copying a song
Here’s how to delete a song saved on the internal hard disk, or copy (duplicate) a
song within the hard disk.
❒ Deleting a song
1. Press the [SONG] key → [F3] key.
The SONG screen Song Edit page will appear in the display. The upper part of the
display will show a list of the songs currently saved on the hard disk. The current
song will be highlighted in the list. The song currently selected for editing will be
indicated by an “E” symbol at the left of the list.
Songs you delete will be lost forever. Use this procedure with caution.
When you delete, copy, or optimize a song, the current song will be saved automatically.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 The song currently selected for editing
B Song name
C Date and time when the song was saved
D Song size
E Song quantization/sampling frequency
F Song protect
It is not possible to delete a protected song. You must load the song, and turn off
the PROTECT button in the SONG screen Setting page before performing the
Delete operation.
180
— Operation Guide
Chapter11—Song management
2. Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display, use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the song that you wish to delete, and press the
[ENTER] key.
An “E” symbol will appear at the left within the list, indicating that the corresponding song is selected for deletion.
Tip!
• If you select a song that is already marked with an “E” and press the [ENTER]
key, the “E” symbol will disappear, and the song will be excluded from the
Delete operation.
• You can select multiple songs for deletion.
It is not possible to delete the current song. If you execute Song Delete with an
“E” symbol displayed for the current song, an error message will appear. Load a
different song to change the current song. Then execute the operation.
3. Move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Delete operation.
4. To execute the Delete operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The current song will automatically be saved, and the specified song(s) will be
deleted.
Tip!
If you wish to cancel without deleting, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
❒ Copying a song
1. Press the [SONG] key → [F3] key to access the SONG screen Song Edit
page.
2. Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display. Use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the song that you wish to copy, and press the
[ENTER] key.
An “E” symbol will appear in the left edge of the list, indicating that the corresponding song is selected for the Copy operation.
— Operation Guide
181
Chapter11—Song management
Tip!
You may select multiple songs (including the current song) for copying.
3. Move the cursor to the COPY button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.
Tip!
• If you decide to cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL
button and press the [ENTER] key.
• After the Copy operation is executed, the hard disk will contain two songs with
identical song name, date, and size. To avoid confusion, we recommend that
you change the song name immediately.
4. To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The current song will be saved automatically, and then the Copy operation will
be executed.
Optimizing a song
By using the top panel [UNDO] key and [REDO] key, you can cancel or re-execute the last-performed recording or track editing operation. By repeatedly pressing the [UNDO] key, you can retrace as many as 15 previous operations. Undo/
redo can be a very convenient function, but when you record or perform a track
editing operation, data for the corresponding number of Undo operations must
be maintained, and this data will occupy space on the hard disk.
The “Optimize” command deletes any audio data that is not currently being used
by the song; i.e., it deletes the Undo data. In order to recover this space, we recommend that you execute the Song Optimize command when you are finished
recording and editing.
1. Press the [SONG] key → [F3] key.
The SONG screen Song Edit page will appear in the display. The upper part of the
display will show a list of the songs currently saved on the hard disk.
2. Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display, use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the song that you wish to optimize, and press
the [ENTER] key.
182
— Operation Guide
Chapter11—Song management
An “E” symbol will appear in the left edge of the list, and the corresponding song
will be selected optimization.
It is not possible to execute Optimize with more than one song selected. If Optimize is executed when the “E” symbol is displayed for more than one song, an
error message will be displayed.
3. Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will ask you to confirm the Optimize command.
4. To execute the Optimize command, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The current song will be saved automatically, and then the Optimize command
will be executed.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel the Optimize command without executing, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
Importing mixer data of an existing song
You can extract the scene memory, automix, tempo map, and library data
(referred to as “mixer data”) of a previously-saved song, and import it into the
current song. For example, this function is convenient when an existing song has
a special effect library that you wish to use in a newly created song.
• Be aware that when you execute the mixer data import command, the corresponding mixer data of the import destination song (the current song) will be
erased, and replaced by the imported mixer data.
• Library mixer data includes all libraries: channel, EQ, dynamics, and effect.
1. If necessary, load the import destination song as the current song.
2. Press the [SONG] key → [F3] key.
The SONG screen Song Edit page will appear in the display. The upper part of the
display will show a list of the songs currently saved in the hard disk. The current
song will be highlighted in the list.
— Operation Guide
183
Chapter11—Song management
3. Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the import source song from which you wish
to import mixer data.
4. Press the [ENTER] key.
An “E” symbol will appear at the left edge of the list, and the corresponding song
will be selected as the import source for mixer data.
• The current song cannot be selected as the import source. If you execute
Import when the current song is marked with an “E” symbol, an error message
will be displayed.
• It is not possible to select two or more songs as the import source.
5. Move the cursor to the MIXER IMP button and press the [ENTER] key.
The MIXER DATA IMPORT popup window will appear.
6. Turn on the button(s) for the type(s) of mixer data that you wish to
import. (You may select more than one.)
• SCENE MEM. button ....Scene memories
• AUTOMIX button .........Automix
• TEMPO MAP button .....Tempo map
• LIBRARY button ...........Libraries (channel/EQ/dynamics/effect)
7. To execute the Import, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel the Import command without executing, move the cursor to
the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
184
— Operation Guide
12
Sampling pads
This chapter explains the sampling pads of the AW4416.
About the sampling pads
The AW4416 has a sampling pad function that allows you to play samples by
striking pads. By striking the eight pads in the SAMPLING PAD section you can
play up to sixteen samples held in RAM, and record your playing on a simple
sequencer that is linked with the recorder.
A sample can be assigned to a pad on one of three ways. You can directly assign
a region (a piece of continuous audio data that was recorded in a single operation) that was recorded earlier on a track, import CD-DA data from an audio CD,
or import a WAV file from a CD-ROM or MO disk.
Region recorded
on a track
Input channel
D-RAM
CD-DA
Bank A
Bank B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Sampling pads
WAV file
Tip!
• The eight sampling pads can be used as sixteen pads by switching between
two banks A and B.
• Sampling pad settings and the samples in RAM are saved as part of the song.
The samples that can be assigned to the pads must be the same audio format as
that song. For example in the case of a song that was created as 24 bit/48 kHz,
CD-DA (16 bit/44.1 kHz) data cannot be imported. In the case of a 16 bit/44.1
kHz song, 16 bit/48 kHz WAV files cannot be imported.
— Operation Guide
185
Chapter12—Sampling pads
Assigning the pad outputs to channels
In order to use the sampling pads, you must first assign each pad output to an
input channel 1–24. The output of a pad that is assigned to a channel can be controlled by attenuation, phase, EQ, and dynamics in the same way as a conventional input, and can be recorded on a track of the recorder.
1. Press the [SETUP] key → [F1] key.
The SETUP screen Patch In page will appear, allowing you to select the input signal for each input channel.
MIXER CHANNEL
INPUT ASSIGN area
2. In the MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN area, move the cursor to the
input channel to which you will assign the pad output.
3. Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to make a selection in the range of “SMP 1”–
”SMP 8.”
The output of the selected pad will be assigned to the input channel.
Tip!
• Pad assignments are common to banks A and B. If “SMP 1” is selected for a
channel, the output of pad 1 for both banks A and B will be assigned to it.
• All sounds assigned to pads will be monaural output.
4. Turn on the [ON] key of the input channel to which the pad is assigned,
and raise the fader.
Now the signal of the pad you selected in step 3 will be sent to the corresponding
input channel, and can be recorded or monitored.
186
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
Assigning a region to a sampling pad
In order to use the pads to play samples, you must first assign the desired samples
to those pads. There are three ways to assign samples to pads.
1 Assign a desired region from tracks 1–16 of the recorder section
B Import an audio CD track from an internal/external CD-RW drive
C Import a WAV file from a SCSI device
As an example, here’s how to assign a region that was previously recorded on a
track.
1. In the SAMPLING PAD section, press the [EDIT] pad → [F1] key.
The SAMP.PAD screen From Rgn. page will appear, allowing you to assign a
desired region to a pad. This page shows three buttons and the regions recorded
on each track.
1
2
3
The three buttons have the following functions.
1 PAD SEL button
Selects the pad to which the region will be assigned.
B RGN. SEL button
Selects the region.
C EXECUTE button
Executes the assignment of the region to the pad.
— Operation Guide
187
Chapter12—Sampling pads
2. Move the cursor to the PAD SEL button in the upper left of the display,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the PAD No. area in the lower right of the display. Pads to
which nothing is assigned will be displayed as “-NO ASN-”.
PAD No. area
3. Use the [CURSOR] keys and the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the pad bank
(A/B) and pad number (1–8) to which a region will be assigned.
4. Press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will return to the PAD SEL button.
5. Move the cursor to the RGN. SEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
The currently selected region will blink.
If you perform this step when no region exists (i.e., when nothing has been
recorded on any track), an message of “ERROR SELECTED SONG HAS NO
REGION” will appear, and it will not be possible to make settings.
6. Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the cursor to select the region.
The currently selected region will be highlighted, and its size will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
Tip!
The sample size that can be assigned to the sampling pads are limited to a total of
approximately 8 MB (approximately 90 seconds at 16 bit/44.1 kHz). If you wish to
assign only a portion of a long region to a pad, you should first use the EDIT screen
TR Edit page to divide the region (→ P.156).
7. Press the [ENTER] key.
The selected region will be highlighted, and the cursor will return to the RGN.
SEL button.
188
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
8. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the assignment to the pad.
9. To execute the assignment, move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
When the assignment is completed, the display will indicate “COMPLETE.”
Tip!
When you assign a region to a pad, a name of “Smpltr” will automatically be
assigned to that pad. If you wish to change this name, refer to page 193.
Tip!
For the procedure of importing CD-DA data or a WAV file to a pad, refer to the Reference Guide.
If you attempt to assign a sample that would exceed the memory capacity, an
error message of “Memory Full” will be displayed, and the assignment will not
be executed.
Tip!
You can check the approximate amount of sample pad memory in the SMPL. PAD
screen PAD Edit page ([EDIT] pad → [F4] key).
— Operation Guide
189
Chapter12—Sampling pads
Trimming a sample
You can make fine adjustments to the playback start location and playback end
location of a sample assigned to a pad in order to eliminate unwanted portions at
the beginning and end.
Use the TRIM IN command to adjust the playback start location, and use the
TRIM OUT command to adjust the playback end location.
Trimming a sample will not increase the sample size that can be assigned to the
sampling pads.
Unwanted portions
Adjust the playback
start location
(TRIM IN)
Adjust the playback
end location
(TRIM OUT)
1. In the SAMPLING PAD section, press the [EDIT] pad → [F4].
The PAD Edit page will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the TRIM IN menu (if you wish to edit the playback
start location) or the TRIM OUT menu (if you wish to edit the playback
end location), and press the [ENTER] key.
190
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
Buttons for setting the TRIM IN/TRIM OUT command parameters will appear.
3. Move the cursor to the PAD button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the PAD No. area in the lower right.
4. Use the [CURSOR] keys and the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the pad bank
and pad number that you wish to trim.
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will return to the PAD button.
6. Move the cursor to the TRIM IN button (if editing the playback start
location) or the TRIM OUT button (if editing the playback end location),
and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the trim value field.
1
2
3
1 TRIM IN/TRIM OUT
Here you can specify the amount of trimming in units of a sample.
B Bank/pad number
This displays the bank and pad number of the currently selected pad.
C PAD SIZE
This displays the length of the currently assigned sample, in units of one sample.
— Operation Guide
191
Chapter12—Sampling pads
7. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the amount of trimming in sample
units.
8. Press the [ENTER] key.
9. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the trimming operation.
10. To execute the trimming operation, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The beginning or end of the sample will be deleted as you specified. Strike the
pad to hear the results.
Once you execute the trimming operation, it cannot be reversed by pressing the
[UNDO] key. If you wish to make fine adjustments again, you must re-assign the
region.
192
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
Naming a pad
You can name each pad to which a sample is assigned.
1. In the SAMPLING PAD section, press the [EDIT] pad → [F4] key.
The PAD Edit page will appear.
2. Move the cursor to the NAME menu and press the [ENTER] key.
The display will show the PAD button used to select a pad, and the NAME button
used to assign a name.
NAME button
3. Move the cursor to the PAD button and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the PAD No. area at the lower right.
4. Use the [CURSOR] keys and the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the bank and
number of the pad that you wish to name.
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will return to the PAD button.
— Operation Guide
193
Chapter12—Sampling pads
6. Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the [ENTER] key.
The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to input the name.
Tip!
A name of up to eight characters can be input.
7. After assigning the desired name, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Tip!
For details on inputting characters, refer to page 60.
Erasing a pad sample and name
Here’s how to erase the sample and name assigned to a pad, returning that pad to
the initial state.
1. In the SAMPLING PAD section, press the [EDIT] pad → [F4] key.
The SAMP.PAD screen PAD Edit page will appear.
ERASE button
2. Move the cursor to the ERASE button and press the [ENTER] key.
The display will show the PAD button used to select the pad, and the EXECUTE
button used to execute the Erase command.
194
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
3. Move the cursor to the PAD button and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the PAD No. area at the lower right.
4. Use the [CURSOR] keys and the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the bank and
pad number of the pad that you wish to erase.
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
Press the [ENTER] key.
The pad will be selected, and the cursor will return to the PAD button.
6. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm that you wish to erase the
pad settings.
7. To execute the Erase command, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
195
Chapter12—Sampling pads
Recording your performance on the
sampling pads
The AW4416 provides a simple sequencer dedicated to the sampling pads which
operates in conjunction with the recorder. This simple sequencer records the timing of the trigger events that occur when you strike a pad, and can be used to
layer kick or snare sounds on the audio tracks, or to add sound effects. Events in a
specified area can also be copied repeatedly as a pattern, or erased.
Here’s how to record your pad performance on the simple sequencer.
1. In the SAMPLING PAD section, press the [EDIT] pad → [F5] key.
The Trig. List page will appear, allowing you to record your pad performance.
1
2 34
5
6
7
This screen shows the following information.
1 PAD
The bank and number of the pads that will be recorded/played.
B NAME (pad name)
This is the name assigned to each pad. Pads to which no sample has been
assigned will be displayed as “-NO ASN-”.
C R button
This is the recording switch for each pad. When you move the cursor and press
the [ENTER] key to change the button display from O to ●, that pad can now be
recorded.
D M button
This is the mute switch for each pad. When you move the cursor and press the
[ENTER] key to change the button display from O to ●, that pad will be muted.
It is not possible to play bank A and B pads simultaneously. The M buttons will
automatically switch to ● for the bank that is not currently selected by the
[BANK] switch, and will be muted.
196
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
E Pad tracks
These tracks record the timing of the trigger events for each pad. The time from
while you press the pad until you release it is shown as a bar graph.
F COPY/ERASE menu
This menu accesses commands for copying/erasing previously-recorded trigger
events. Move the cursor to the desired menu and press the [ENTER] key to access
the list of commands.
G Parameter value area
In this area you can set the parameters required to execute the command.
2. Use the [CURSOR] keys and the [ENTER] key to switch the R column of
the pad(s) you wish to record from O to ●.
3. Start the recorder, and strike the pads while listening to the playback of
the audio tracks.
Trigger events will be recorded on the corresponding pad track.
4. When you are finished performing, stop playback on the recorder.
Tip!
• You can also begin recording from the middle of the song.
• Immediately after recording, you can press the [UNDO] key to cancel trigger
event recording.
— Operation Guide
197
Chapter12—Sampling pads
5. Use the [CURSOR] keys and the [ENTER] key to change the R column
from ● back to O, and play back the recorder to hear the playback of
the trigger events.
Be aware that if you play back the recorder when the R column still displays ●
and strike the pads, your new performance will be recorded.
Tip!
If you switch the M column of a pad from O to ●, that pad track will be muted even
if you play back the recorder.
Copying a pad performance
Here’s how to copy a recorded pad performance to another location.
1. In the SAMPLING PAD section, press the [EDIT] pad → [F5] key.
The Trig. List page will appear.
COPY button
2. Move the cursor to the COPY menu and press the [ENTER] key.
The parameters for the copy command will appear. These parameters have the
following functions.
198
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
❍ FR. PAD (from pad)
Specify the copy source pad track.
❍ FR. START (from start)
❍ FR. END (from end)
Specify the beginning (FR. START) and end (FR. END) of the area that will be copied from the pad track specified by FR. PAD. The specified area will be selected
as a pattern.
❍ TO PAD
Select the copy destination pad track.
❍ TO START
Specify the location in the pad track selected by TO PAD at which the data will
be copied.
❍ TIMES (copy times)
Specify the number of times that the data will be copied. The pattern selected as
the copy source will be copied repeatedly.
FR. START
FR. END
Copy source
pad track
(FR. PAD)
COPY (TIMES= 3)
Copy destination
pad track
(TO PAD)
TO START
Please note that the above operation does not copy the sample itself, but rather
the pad operation. This means that if the copy source and copy destination track
are different, a different sample will be played at the copy destination. Even if
you specify FR.START or FR.END during pad playback on the copy destination
track, the sample will always play back from the beginning for the specified
length on the copy destination track.
FR. START
FR. END
Copy source
pad track
(FR. PAD)
COPY
Copy destination
pad track
(TO PAD)
TO START
— Operation Guide
199
Chapter12—Sampling pads
❍ INTERVAL
When copying multiple times, this parameter specifies the interval between copy
destination patterns.
FR. START
FR. END
Copy source
pad track
(FR. PAD)
COPY (TIMES= 3)
Copy destination
pad track
(TO PAD)
TO START
INTERVAL
❍ INSERT
Specify whether the pattern will be inserted (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite) at
the copy destination.
❍ EXECUTE
This button executes the Copy operation.
Tip!
• If you set the counter to measure units, you can set the FR. START, FR. END,
and TO START parameters in measure/beat units.
• Instead of using the [DATA/JOG] dial to vary a location continuously, you can
use the keys of the locate section to move instantly to a desired locate point or
marker.
3. Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you wish to change,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the parameter setting, and the value of the selected
parameter will be displayed.
4. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the parameter, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The setting will change, and the cursor will return to the parameter location of
step 3.
5. Repeat steps 3–4 to set the remaining parameters.
6. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Copy command.
200
— Operation Guide
Chapter12—Sampling pads
7. To execute the Copy, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Tip!
You can undo the result of the copy by pressing the [UNDO] key immediately after
executing Copy.
Erasing a pad performance
Here’s how to erase a pad performance that you recorded.
1. In the SAMPLING PAD section, press the [EDIT] pad → [F5] key.
The Trig. List page will appear.
ERASE button
2. Move the cursor to the ERASE menu, and press the [ENTER] key.
The parameters for the Erase command will appear. Each parameter has the following function.
❍ PAD
Select the pad track that will be erased.
— Operation Guide
201
Chapter12—Sampling pads
❍ START
❍ END
Specify the beginning (START) and end (END) of the area that will be erased from
the pad track selected by PAD.
❍ EXECUTE
This button executes the Erase command.
Tip!
• If you set the counter to measure units, you can set the START and END
parameters in measure/beat units.
• Instead of using the [DATA/JOG] dial to vary a location continuously, you can
use the keys of the locate section to move instantly to a desired locate point or
marker.
3. Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you wish to change,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The cursor will move to the parameter setting, and the value of the selected
parameter will be displayed.
4. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the parameter, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The setting will change, and the cursor will return to the parameter location of
step 3.
5. Repeat steps 3–4 to set the remaining parameters.
6. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Erase command.
7. To execute the Erase command, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Tip!
You can undo the result of the erasure by pressing the [UNDO] key immediately
after executing Erase.
202
— Operation Guide
13
Scene memory
This chapter explains the scene memory function and how to use it.
About scene memory
On the AW4416, settings such as the mix parameters of each channel, external
input/output patching, and effect 1/2 parameters can be assigned a name and stored
in internal memory as a “scene.” The memory area in which these scenes are stored
is called “scene memory.” Up to 96 scenes can be stored for a single song, and can
be recalled by operations of the AW4416’s keys or by the automix function. All
scenes stored in scene memory are saved on the hard disk as part of the song.
❒ Parameters included in a scene
The following parameters are included in a scene.
Fader locations for all channels and buses (input channels
1–24, recorder monitor channels 1–16, AUX send levels 1–
8, effect returns 1/2, stereo)
ON key settings of all channels
Attenuation settings of all channels
Phrase settings of all channels
Mix parameters
EQ settings of all channels
Pan settings of all channels
Routing settings of all channels
Fader group settings of all channels
Pair settings of all channels
Dynamics settings of all channels
Delay settings of all channels
Effect parameters
Parameter settings of effects 1/2
Scene name settings
Other
Fader recall fade time settings
Internal input/output patching and insert settings
❒ About scene numbers
There are 97 scene numbers, numbered 00–96. Of these, scenes can be stored in
scene numbers 01–96. Scene number 00 contains a scene that returns the parameters to the initial state of the AW4416, and is for recall only.
— Operation Guide
203
Chapter13—Scene memory
The currently recalled scene number is displayed at the upper right of the level
meter/counter. When a key of the MIXER section, FADER MODE section, AUTOMATION section, or UNIT section (except for the [FILE] key) is pressed, the upper
right of the display will show the number and name of the currently recalled
scene.
TC
SCENE
TER
VE
E
Scene number
–dB 0
FINE 2
H
M
S
F
ms
AIN
BS
EL
0
2
6
2
0
0
2
0
Y
T
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
MTC
SCENE
MASTER
SLAVE
E
–dB 0
FINE 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
L
R
• Level meter/counter
Scene name
• Display
If an “E” character is displayed at the right of the scene number, this means that
the currently operated scene (the “current scene”) is different than the previously
recalled or saved contents.
When the read-only scene number 00 is recalled, a
cating that the scene is read-only.
symbol will appear, indi-
Storing a scene
Here’s how to assign a name to the current scene and store it in a scene memory.
1. Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.
The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear. A list of the scenes (scene
numbers and scene names) stored in scene memory will be shown in the center
of the display. The last-recalled scene will be highlighted in the list. For scene
numbers in which no data has been stored, the scene number field will indicate
“[ No Data ! ].”
204
— Operation Guide
Chapter13—Scene memory
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the store destination scene number
(01–96).
• Scene number 00 is for recall only, and cannot be stored.
• Be aware that if you select a previously-stored scene number and execute the
Store operation, the previous scene will be lost.
3. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the
STORE button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to specify the name of
the scene (scene name).
4. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys and the [DATA/JOG] dial to
specify the name of the scene.
For details on inputting characters, refer to page 60.
5. To store the scene, move the cursor to the OK button in the screen and
press the [ENTER] key.
The scene will be stored, and the AW4416 will be in the same state as when the
store destination scene number of step 2 is recalled. To cancel without storing the
scene, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
Tip!
• To prevent a stored scene from accidentally being overwritten, you can make
memory protect settings for each scene number. For details refer to page 208.
• You can use the keys of the SCENE MEMORY section to store a scene even
when you are in a screen other than the SCENE screen Scene Mem page. For
details refer to page 211.
— Operation Guide
205
Chapter13—Scene memory
Recalling a scene
Here’s how to recall the scene data stored in a scene memory.
1. Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.
The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene that you wish to recall.
3. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the
RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the recall.
4. To execute the recall, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
To cancel without recalling, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the
[ENTER] key.
When you execute the recall, the data of the current scene will be discarded. If
you will need to reproduce the current scene, you must save it before recalling
another scene.
Tip!
• You can use the keys of the SCENE MEMORY section to recall a scene even
when you are in a screen other than the SCENE screen Scene Mem page. For
details refer to page 212.
• You can use program changes to recall AW4416 scenes from an external
device (→ P.235), or use the automix function to recall scenes (→ P.225).
• If desired, you can specify the time (fade time) over which the faders will move
to their new locations when a scene is recalled, or exclude specific faders from
the recall. For details on these settings, refer to the Reference Guide “SCENE
screen/Fade Time page”, “SCENE screen/RCL. Safe page”.
206
— Operation Guide
Chapter13—Scene memory
Editing the name of a scene
Here’s how you can edit just the name of a stored scene.
1. Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.
The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene whose scene name you wish
to edit.
It is not possible to select a scene that has not been stored, a scene whose protect
setting is on, or scene number 00.
3. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the TITLE
EDIT button in the upper left of the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the scene name.
4. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[
the new scene name.
]/[ ]/[ ] keys and the [ENTER] key to input
5. To finalize the edited scene name, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The scene name will be updated. If you wish to cancel without changing the
scene name, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.
— Operation Guide
207
Chapter13—Scene memory
Protecting a scene
You can memory-protect each individual scene that has been stored. A scene
number for which protect is turned on can only be recalled.
1. Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.
The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene number that you wish to
protect.
It is not possible to select a scene number that has not been stored or scene number 00.
3. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the PROTECTION field and press the [ENTER] key.
The button display will change from “OFF” to “ON,” indicating that the selected
scene is protected. Scenes that are protected will be indicated by a lock icon ( )
displayed in the PRT column of the list.
4. To turn protect off, use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a protected scene
in the same page, move the cursor to the PROTECTION button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The button display will change from “ON” to “OFF,” indicating that protect has
been turned off.
208
— Operation Guide
Chapter13—Scene memory
By using the PROTECTION ON/OFF GLOBAL buttons in the Scene Mem page,
you can turn protect on/off for entire groups of scene memories.
❍ SCENE 01–50 ON/OFF buttons
Turn protect on/off for scene numbers 01–50.
❍ SCENE 51–96 ON/OFF buttons
Turn protect on/off for scene numbers 51–96.
Changing the order of scenes
Any scene saved in scene numbers 01–96 can be moved to a different scene
number.
1. Press the [SCENE] key → [F4] key.
In this example, scene names “A,” “B,” “C,” and “D” have been saved in scene
numbers 01–04.
2. Press the CURSOR [ ] key to move the cursor to the list at left
(SOURCE), and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the move source scene.
In this example, we will select scene “D” which is stored in scene number 04.
— Operation Guide
209
Chapter13—Scene memory
3. Press the CURSOR [ ] key to move the cursor to the list at right (DESTINATION), and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the move destination.
In this example, we will select a location between scene numbers 01 and 02.
4. To move the scene, press the CURSOR [ ] key to move the cursor to the
EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key.
Scene “D” will move to scene number 02, and the scene numbers of scenes “B”
and “C” will be incremented. In this example, scene numbers 01–04 will be rearranged in the order of scenes “A,” “D,” “B,” and “C.”
210
— Operation Guide
Chapter13—Scene memory
Using keys to store/recall a scene
You can also store/recall a scene by using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY section. By using this method, you can perform these operations even when you are
in a screen other than the Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen. For example,
this method is convenient when you are editing mix parameters, and wish to
overwrite the same scene repeatedly.
Storing a scene
1. Use the [
]/[
] keys to select the store destination scene number.
The scene number is displayed in the upper right of the level meter/counter.
TC
SCENE
TER
VE
E
–dB 0
FINE 2
H
M
S
F
ms
REMAIN
ABS
REL
WORD CLOCK
44.1k 48k LOCK
INT EXT
VARI
MTC
SCENE
MASTER
SLAVE
E
–dB 0
–dB 0
FINE 2
FINE 2
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
6
10 12
14 20
18 30
20
42
26 60
READY
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
READY
INPUT
L
R
2. Press the [STORE] key.
The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear in the display, allowing you to specify
the scene name.
3. As desired, use the CURSOR [
to specify the scene name.
]/[
]/[ ]/[ ] keys and the [ENTER] key
4. To execute the Store operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Tip!
If desired, you can cause the Store operation to be executed immediately when you
press the [STORE] key, instead of accessing the popup window. For details on this
setting, refer to the Reference Guide “UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page.”
— Operation Guide
211
Chapter13—Scene memory
Recalling a scene
1. Use the [
recall.
]/[
] keys to select the scene number that you wish to
The scene number is displayed in the upper right of the level meter/counter.
2. Press the [RECALL] key.
A popup window will appear in the display, asking you to confirm the recall.
3. To execute the recall, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Tip!
If desired, you can cause the Recall operation to be executed immediately when
you press the [RECALL] key, instead of accessing the popup window. For details on
this setting, refer to the Reference Guide “UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page.”
212
— Operation Guide
14
Automix
This chapter explains how to record and play back automix, and how to
edit a recorded automix.
What is automix?
The AW4416 provides an “automix function” that allows controller operations
and parameter changes to be recorded in realtime along with the song. Scene
recall operations or movements of the channel faders and [ON] keys can be
recorded into the automix to completely automate the mix. You will find this particularly valuable when performing ping-pong recording or during mixdown.
The following items can be recorded in the automix.
• Fader operations of each channel
• [ON] key operations of each channel
• Pan operations of each channel
• EQ operations of each channel
• AUX send operations of each channel
• Scene memory/library recall operations
You can record fader operations, pan operations, EQ operations, and scene memory recall operations etc. in separate passes, or use punch-in/out to re-record specific items. The timing and values of individual pieces of recorded data (referred
to as “events”) can be edited off-line (i.e., with automix stopped).
Up to sixteen different automixes can be stored in internal memory for a song,
and you can recall and use any one of these automixes as desired. (The currently
selected automix is called the “current automix.”) The sixteen automixes saved in
internal memory are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently selected song
(the current song).
The automix of the AW4416 is always linked to the absolute time of the song.
When you play back the song, automix will start playing or recording at the same
absolute time, and when you stop the song, automix will also stop. It is not possible to use the automix function by itself with the song stopped, or to change the
alignment between the starting location of the song and the starting location of
automix.
— Operation Guide
213
Chapter14—Automix
Creating a new automix
In order to record an automix, you must first create a new automix.
When you create a new automix, the contents of the current automix will be
erased. If you wish to save the contents of the current automix, refer to page 228
“Storing an automix.”
1. While playing back the beginning of the song, set the channel faders,
pan, EQ, and effect send/return etc., and save the settings in a scene
memory.
The scene you save here will be the starting point for recording the automix.
Alternatively, if you wish to use a previously-recorded scene as the starting point
for the automix, recall that scene.
2. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F2] key.
The following display will appear.
NEW MIX button
3. Move the cursor to the NEW MIX button in the upper right of the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
A message of “Will Make New Automix, ARE YOU SURE?” will appear.
4. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The current automix will be erased, and the automix will be initialized.
Note
If you decide to cancel without creating a new automix, move the cursor to the
CANCEL button after step 3, and press the [ENTER] key.
214
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
5. Press the [F4] key.
The Event List page will appear, where you can edit the events recorded in the
current automix.
On
Notice that data for the scene number you saved in step 1 is entered at the
“00:00:00.000” location in the TIME column. This event recalls a scene at absolute time location “00:00:00.000” of the song. When you create a new automix,
data recalling the current scene (the last recalled or stored scene) will be written
into this location. This scene number or time can be modified later if desired.
Note
If an event recalling the scene memory is not displayed when you press the [F4] button, make sure that the SCENE/LIB button in the upper left of the screen is on (highlighted).
— Operation Guide
215
Chapter14—Automix
Recording the first section
Here we will explain the procedure for recording fader operations of the monitor
channels.
1. Press the [HOME] key of the FADER MODE section, and the [MONI] key
of the MIXING LAYER section.
Faders 1–16 will function as the channel faders for monitor channels 1–16.
2. Locate the song to a point slightly earlier than where you wish to begin
recording the automix.
3. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.
AUTOMIX field
4. Move the cursor to the DISABLE button of the AUTOMIX field, and press
the [ENTER] key.
The button will be turned on (highlighted), and its title will change to ENABLE.
Now automix is on (i.e., can be recorded or played). Whenever automix is on,
the
icon will always be displayed at the left of the on-screen counter.
On
5. Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field. Turn the FADER button on,
and turn off the remaining buttons (CH ON, PAN, EQ).
The FADER/CH ON/PAN/EQ buttons in the OVERWRITE field are used to select
the events that will be recorded in the automix. If a button is on (highlighted), the
corresponding type of event can be recorded in the automix. The following
events correspond to each button.
• FADER..................Operations of the faders and AUX send 1–8 faders of each
channel
• CH ON.................Operations of the [ON] switches of each channel
• PAN......................Pan operations of each channel
• EQ........................EQ operations of each channel
216
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
Scene and library recall operations can be recorded at any time, regardless of
these settings.
6. Move the cursor to the REC button in the screen, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The REC button will blink, indicating that the AW4416 is ready to record automix.
7. Use the [SEL] keys to select the channels whose fader operations you
wish to record.
When automix is in record-ready mode, you can use the [SEL] keys to select the
channel that will be recorded. At this time, the [SEL] keys will blink.
8. Press the [PLAY] key on the top panel to begin song playback.
When you press the [PLAY] key, the REC button in the screen will turn on (highlighted), and automix recording will begin. While automix is being recorded, the
symbol at the left of the on-screen counter will be highlighted ( ).
on (highlighted)
9. While listening to the song, operate the faders of each channel.
10. When you have finished your operations, press the [STOP] key on the
top panel to stop the song.
The on-screen REC button will turn off (normal display), and automix recording
will stop. A message will ask whether you wish to update the automix with the
newly recorded content.
— Operation Guide
217
Chapter14—Automix
11. If you wish to update the automix with the newly recorded content,
move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The automix will be updated. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and
press the [ENTER] key, the recorded content will be discarded, and the automix
will return to its previous state.
Note
• If in step 10 you move the cursor to the ABORT button and press the [ENTER]
key, the recorded content will be discarded in the same way, and the automix
will return to its previous state.
• Automix recording can also be stopped by using the on-screen STOP button
instead of the [STOP] key. In this case, automix recording will stop, but the
song will continue playing.
• Even after updating the automix content, you still move the cursor to the
UNDO button in the right side of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to
return the automix to its state before recording (Undo). The front panel
[UNDO] key cannot be used to undo automix.
Playing back automix
Here’s how to play back the recorded automix.
1. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.
On
Off
2. Make sure that the button in the AUTOMIX field is displayed as
“ENABLE.”
If the button is displayed as “DISABLE,” move the cursor to the button, and press
the [ENTER] key.
3. Make sure that the on-screen REC button and AUTO REC button are
turned off.
If they are on, move the cursor to the corresponding button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
4. Locate the song to a point slightly earlier than where you began recording automix, and press the top panel [PLAY] key.
218
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
The on-screen PLAY button will turn on (the STOP button will turn off), and automix will begin playing automatically.
Note
If you begin playback from the middle of the song, automix will also begin playing
from the same location. At this time if any automix events exist before the playback
start location, automix will begin playback from a state of having executed all of
these earlier events (i.e., the mix will be updated before playback begins).
5. To stop automix playback, move the cursor to the on-screen STOP button and press the [ENTER] key, or press the top panel [STOP] key.
Even if automix is not stopped manually in this way, it will stop automatically
after all of the recorded automix events have been played.
Overwriting events
New data can be overwritten (added or rewritten) onto a previously-recorded
automix, either on a different channel or different mix element on the same channel. For example after recording fader operations for monitor channel 1, you can
then record fader operations for monitor channel 2, or record pan operations on
the same channel. The following explanation shows pan or EQ operations can be
overwritten onto an automix that already contains previously-recorded operations of the monitor channel faders.
You can use the same procedure to overwrite (rewrite) the previously-recorded
events of a previously-recorded channel. In this case, the previously-recorded
content will be erased when you begin overwrite-recording.
1. Press the [HOME] key of the FADER MODE section, and the [MONI] key
of the MIXING LAYER section.
2. Locate the song to a point slightly before the location where you wish to
begin overwriting.
3. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.
On
— Operation Guide
219
Chapter14—Automix
4. Make sure that the button in the AUTOMIX field is displayed as
“ENABLE.”
5. Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field. Turn the PAN button and EQ
button on, and the remaining buttons (FADER, CH ON) off.
6. Move the cursor to the on-screen REC button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
7. Press [SEL] key 1.
Monitor channel 1 will be selected for recording.
You can use the [SEL] keys to select multiple channels for overwriting. However,
operations of the [PAN]/[EQ] controls will be recorded only for the channel that
you selected last by pressing the [SEL] key.
8. Press the top panel [PLAY] key to begin song playback.
Simultaneously with the start of song playback, the previously-recorded automix
will also play back.
9. While listening to the song, operate the [PAN] control.
When recording pan or EQ operations in the automix, it is convenient to use the
[PAN]/[EQ] controls at the right of the display.
Note
When you operate the [PAN] control and [EQ] controls, the pan and EQ settings of
the corresponding channel will be displayed briefly in the upper part of the screen.
10. When you are finished, press the top panel [STOP] key.
Automix recording will stop, and a message will ask whether you wish to update
the automix with the newly recorded content.
11. To update the automix with the newly recorded content, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
220
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
Automix punch-in/out
If you make a mistake while recording the automix, you can re-record just the
location of your error (punch-in/out). As an example here, we will explain how to
punch-in/out to re-record the pan operations of monitor channel 1 that you
already recorded. When punching-in/out on only a specific channel, it is convenient to use the on-screen AUTO REC button instead of the on-screen REC button.
1. Press the [HOME] key in the FADER MODE section, and the [MONI] key
in the MIXING LAYER section.
2. Locate the song to a point slightly earlier than the location where you
wish to punch-in.
If you will be punching-in/out repeatedly on the automix, it is convenient to set a
locate point at a location earlier than the intended punch-in. For details on
locate points, refer to page 109.
3. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.
Make sure that the AUTOMIX button is displayed as “ENABLE.”
On
4. Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field. Turn the PAN button on, and
the remaining buttons (FADER, CH ON, EQ) off.
5. Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button in the lower right of the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The AUTO REC button will turn on.
Note
When you use the AUTO REC button instead of the REC button, you can select the
recording channel after placing automix in record-ready mode. It is not necessary to
use the [SEL] keys to select the channel beforehand.
— Operation Guide
221
Chapter14—Automix
6. Press the top panel [PLAY] key to play back the song.
When song playback is started with the AUTO REC button on, the REC button
will be turned on automatically, and automix will be in record mode. However,
recording will not actually occur since the recording channel has not yet been
selected.
7. When the song arrives at the punch-in location, press [SEL] key 1 (monitor channel 1).
Recording of pan operations on the corresponding channel will begin at the
moment you press the [SEL] key (punch-in). At this time, the corresponding [SEL]
key will blink.
8. While listening to the song, operate the [PAN] control.
9. When you are finished, press the [SEL] key of the same channel once
again.
The [SEL] key of the corresponding channel will go dark, and recording will end
(punch-out). Automix will still be in a recordable state, but recording will not
actually occur since no recording channel is selected.
Note
If you did not operate the [PAN] control in step 8, the currently-recorded pan operation events between the punch-in and punch-out locations will be erased. This
method can be used to erase specific events from the corresponding section of the
song.
10. Press the top panel [STOP] key.
A message will ask whether you wish to update the automix with the newly
recorded content. If you wish to update the automix, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key.
When you stop the song, the on-screen REC will return to the Off state. However,
since the AUTO REC button will remain on, you can punch-in on the automix
again by pressing the [PLAY] key. If you wish to turn off the AUTO REC button,
move the cursor to the AUTO REC button, and press the [ENTER] key.
222
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
Editing the fader movements
Fader operation events recorded in the automix can be precisely edited in realtime while watching the fader movements in a special screen. As an example
here, we will explain how to edit the previously-recorded fader movements of
monitor channel 1.
1. Press the [HOME] key of the FADER MODE section, and the [MONI] key
of the MIXING LAYER section.
2. Locate the song to a point slightly earlier that where you wish to punchin.
3. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.
Make sure that the button in the AUTOMIX field is displayed as “ENABLE.”
On
4. Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field. Turn the FADER button on,
and the other buttons (CH ON, PAN, EQ) off.
5. Press the [F3] key.
A page will appear in which the current locations for the faders of each channel
(monitor channels 1–16) are shown as a bar graph. When you wish to make
detailed edits to the fader movements recorded in the automix, it is convenient to
do so while viewing this screen.
— Operation Guide
223
Chapter14—Automix
6. Make sure that the ABSOLUTE button in the FADER EDIT MODE field is
turned on.
The two buttons of the FADER EDIT MODE field in the screen are used to select
the fader editing method. When the ABSOLUTE button is on, previouslyrecorded events will be erased, and new events will be recorded.
Note
Use the RELATIVE button when you wish to make relative changes to the previously-recorded fader events. For details refer to the Reference Guide “AUTOMIX
screen/Main page.”
7. Move the cursor to the on-screen AUTO REC button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
8. Press the top panel [PLAY] key to play back the song.
When song playback is started with the AUTO REC button on, the REC button
will be turned on automatically, and automix will be in record mode. However,
recording will not actually occur, since a recording channel has not yet been
selected.
9. While listening to the song, press [SEL] key 1 (monitor channel 1) at the
point where you wish to punch-in, and begin operating the fader.
Punch-in will begin at the instant you press the [SEL] key. When you operate the
fader, the previously-recorded position of the fader and the position currently
being recorded will both be displayed in the bar graph. The upward or downward
arrow shown beside the bar graph indicates the direction in which you can move
the fader to return to the previously-recorded position.
Previously-recorded
fader/encoder position
Fader/encoder position
now being recorded
Fader/encoder position
now being recorded
Previously-recorded
fader/encoder position
(1) If the fader/encoder is lowered
below the previous value
(2) If the fader/encoder is raised
above the previous value
10. When you are finished operating the fader, press the [SEL] key of the
same channel to punch-out.
Note
If you turn on the RET button in the FADER EDIT OUT field before you begin
punch-in, the faders will automatically return to the previously-recorded positions
as soon as you punch-out. This is convenient when you wish to change the level
only for the punch-in/out area. You can use the knob located at the right of the RET
button to adjust the time over which faders will return to the previously-recorded
positions. For details refer to the Reference Guide “AUTOMIX screen/Main page.”
224
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
11. When you are finished with punch-in/out, press the top panel [STOP]
key.
A message will ask you whether you wish to update the automix with the newly
recorded content. If you wish to update the automix, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key.
Editing automix off-line
While the AW4416 is off-line, you can adjust the timing or value of previouslyrecorded events, or delete unwanted events. The following types of event can be
edited off-line.
• Fader operations for each channel
• [ON] key operations for each channel
• Pan operations for each channel
• Scene memory or library recall operations
Event times are always displayed as absolute song time. For this reason, we recommend that you display the absolute song time in the counter when editing
events off-line (→ P.39).
As an example, we will explain how to edit a scene recall or library recall event.
1. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F4] key.
The EventList page will appear, displaying a list of the events recorded in automix.
2
1
5
6
3
4
7
Use the SCENE/LIB, CH ON, PAN, and FADER buttons in the upper part of the
screen to select the type of events that will be displayed. The following events
correspond to each button.
1 SCENE/LIB button.......Scene or library recall operations
B CH ON button ............[ON] key operations for each channel
C PAN button .................Pan operations for each channel
D FADER button .............Fader operations for each channel
— Operation Guide
225
Chapter14—Automix
2. Move the cursor to the SCENE/LIB button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The scene/library recall events recorded in the automix will be displayed in the
list. The event enclosed by the dashed line in the center of the list is the event currently selected for editing.
3. Move the cursor to the
at the left of the list, and rotate the [DATA/
JOG] dial to scroll the list and select the event that you wish to edit.
4. Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to move the cursor to the data item
within that event that you wish to edit.
E TIME
The timing at which the event will be executed is displayed as “hours:minutes:seconds:milliseconds.”
F EVENT
This area shows the type and value of the event. The type of events that can be
selected in this area will depend on which of the buttons above has been pressed.
When the SCENE/LIB button is on, the following events can be selected.
• SCENE .................Scene memories. The value at the right is the number of the
scene that will be recalled.
• EQ.Lib. ................EQ libraries. The value at the right is the number of the EQ
library that will be recalled.
• DY.Lib. ................Dynamics libraries. The value at the right is the number of
the dynamics library that will be recalled.
• EF.Lib. ..................Effect libraries. The value at the right is the number of the
effect library that will be recalled.
• CH.Lib. ................Channel libraries. The value at the right is the number of the
channel library that will be recalled.
G CHANNEL
This shows the channel (input channels 1–24, monitor channels 1–16, stereo output channel, return channels 1/2) for which the event will be recalled. This will
be blank if scene memory has been selected in 6.
5. Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to modify the value of the item where the
cursor is located.
226
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
When you change the timing of an event, the cursor may jump one or more rows
of the list to another location. This is because events are sorted in order of time,
and is not a malfunction. The timing of events can be adjusted in fine steps of 25
msec.
Note
If the SELECTED CH ONLY button in the upper right of the screen is turned on, the
screen will display only events of the channel selected by the [SEL] key.
6. To add a new event, move the cursor to the DUPLICATE button in the
upper right of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The event currently selected for editing will be duplicated. Modify its timing,
event type, and value as desired.
7. To delete an unwanted event, move the cursor to the DELETE button in
the upper right of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The event currently selected for editing will be deleted.
Note
AUX 1–8 send level or EQ operations cannot be performed off-line. You must use
punch-in/out to overwrite or delete these operations in the specified range.
— Operation Guide
227
Chapter14—Automix
Storing an automix
When you have completed the current automix, you should assign a name and
store it in automix memory. Sixteen automixes can be stored in internal memory.
Note
Automix data that you store is saved on the hard disk as part of the current song.
This means that you can create up to sixteen different automix versions for one
song, and compare them at any time.
1. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F2] key.
2. Move the cursor to the list in the center of the screen, and rotate the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the store destination automix number.
You can select automix numbers 01–16. Vacant automix numbers will be displayed in the list as “[ No Data! ].”
3. Move the cursor to the STORE button located at the left of the list, and
press the [ENTER] key.
A screen will appear where you can input the automix name. Assign a name of
up to sixteen characters. (For details on inputting characters, refer to page 60.)
4. After you have input the automix name, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The current automix data will be stored in the selected automix number.
228
— Operation Guide
Chapter14—Automix
Tip!
If you turn STORE CONFIRMATION “OFF” in the Prefer.1 page of the UTILITY
screen ([UTILITY] key → [F2] key), the automix will be stored in the specified automix number without this screen appearing. This method is convenient when you
wish to repeatedly overwrite an automix into the same automix number.
The internal automix memory is shared between the current automix and a maximum of sixteen stored automixes. This means that if the current automix occupies a large amount of automix memory, it may be impossible to store the
automix even if there are vacant automix numbers in the list. If this occurs, clear
previously-saved automix data that you no longer need (Refer to the Reference
Guide “AUTOMIX screen/Memory page”), and then execute the Store operation
once again.
— Operation Guide
229
Chapter14—Automix
Recalling an automix
Here’s how to recall an automix that was saved in memory.
1. Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F2] key.
2. Move the cursor to the list in the center of the screen, and rotate the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the automix number that you wish to recall.
3. Move the cursor to the RECALL button located at the left of the list, and
press the [ENTER] key.
A message will ask you to confirm that you wish to recall the automix number
selected in step 2.
4. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
The recall will be executed, and the current automix will be replaced by the
automix data that you recalled.
230
— Operation Guide
15
MIDI
This chapter explains how you can use MIDI when operating the AW4416.
What you can do using MIDI
On the AW4416, MIDI can be used to perform the following operations.
❍ Change scenes by remote control
By transmitting program changes from an external device to the AW4416, you
can switch AW4416 scenes by remote control. You can also cause program
changes to be transmitted to an external device when you select scenes on the
AW4416.
❍ Synchronize with an external device via MTC/MIDI Clock
Synchronization messages such as MTC (MIDI Time Code) or MIDI Clock can be
transmitted from the AW4416 to an external device such as a MIDI sequencer, so
that it will operate in synchronization with the AW4416 song. (MTC can also be
received by the AW4416.)
❍ Remote control via MMC
MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages from a computer or other external
device can be received to remotely control the operation of the AW4416’s transport, or to select/defeat recording tracks.
— Operation Guide
231
Chapter15—MIDI
MIDI connectors and the TO HOST
connector
The AW4416 provides the following connectors used to convey MIDI messages.
MIDI
MTC OUT
OUT/ THRU
IN
❍ MIDI IN connector
MIDI messages such as program change, MMC, and MTC are received at this
connector.
❍ MIDI OUT/THRU connector
By changing the setting of an internal parameter, this connector can function
either as a MIDI OUT connector or a MIDI THRU connector. When used as a
MIDI OUT connector, it will transmit MIDI messages such as program change,
MMC, and MIDI Clock. When used as a MIDI THRU connector, it will re-transmit
the messages received at the MIDI IN connector without change.
❍ MTC OUT connector
This is a dedicated output connector for MTC.
TO HOST
❍ TO HOST connector
A separately sold cable can be used to connect this to the serial port of your computer, allowing MIDI messages to be exchanged directly between the AW4416
and your computer. In order to use this connector, you will need to set the MIDI
port setting to “TO HOST PC1,” “TO HOST PC 2,” or “TO HOST MAC,” depending on the computer you are using (→ P.233).
• The TO HOST connector cannot be used simultaneously with the MIDI IN
connector and MIDI OUT/THRU connector.
• MTC cannot be transmitted via the TO HOST connector. If you need to transmit MTC to your computer, use the MTC OUT connector.
• Regardless of the port setting, the OUT/THRU connector will function as
THRU if MIDI THRU is selected.
232
— Operation Guide
Chapter15—MIDI
Using the TO HOST connector for
direct connection to your computer
Connections
To exchange MIDI messages directly between the AW4416 and your computer,
use a separately sold cable to connect the TO HOST connector of the AW4416 to
the serial port of your computer.
Connection to an IBM/PC series computer
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
Connection cable
(YAMAHA-CCJ-PC2)
PORT SELECT Setting=
TO HOST PC2
TO HOST
connector
RS-232C
(DB-9)
AW4416
IBM/PC series
Connection to an Apple Macintosh series computer
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
Connection cable
(YAMAHA-CCJ-MAC)
PORT SELECT Setting=
TO HOST MAC
MODEM
port
TO HOST
connector
Apple Macintosh series
AW4416
❍ IBM/PC series: D-SUB9P → mini DIN8P cross cable
mini DIN 8-pin
7
6
8
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
3
4
8
5
8 (CTS)
7 (RTS)
2 (RxD)
5 (GND)
3 (TxD)
D-SUB 9-pin
1
6
5
9
If your PC has a D-SUB 25-pin connector,
use a Yamaha CCJ-PC1 cable together with
a male/female conversion adapter.
— Operation Guide
233
Chapter15—MIDI
❍ Apple Macintosh series: 8-pin system peripheral cable
mini DIN 8-pin
7
6
8
3
4
5
1
2
mini DIN 8-pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 (HSK i)
1 (HSK O)
5 (RxD -)
4 (GND)
3 (TxD -)
8 (RxD +)
7 (GPI)
6 (TxD +)
7
6
8
3
4
5
1
2
In the case of some Macintosh computers that have no modem/printer cable, it is
not possible to make direct connections to the AW4416’s TO HOST connector.
Setting the PORT SELECT parameter
In order to use the TO HOST connector, the AW4416’s PORT SELECT parameter
must be set appropriately for the type of computer that is selected.
1. Press [MIDI], and then press the [F1] key.
The MIDI Setup page will appear, allowing you to make MIDI-related settings for
the AW4416.
2. Move the cursor to the PORT SELECT knob, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial
to select the setting appropriate for your computer.
The following types of computer require the following PORT SELECT parameter
settings.
• IBM/PC series: TO HOST PC 2 (38.4 kbps)
• Apple Macintosh series (models with modem/printer port): TO HOST MAC
• Depending on your system, you may need separate driver software in order to
make serial port connections.
• When connecting to a Macintosh, you must set the MIDI interface clock setting of your application to 1 MHz.
234
— Operation Guide
Chapter15—MIDI
Switching AW4416 scenes from an
external device
By transmitting program changes from an external device to the AW4416, you
can recall AW4416 scene memories by remote control.
1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external device to the MIDI IN
connector of the AW4416.
MIDI IN connector
MIDI OUT connector
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
External device
(MIDI sequencer etc.)
AW4416
2. Press the [MIDI] key, and then press the [F1] key.
The MIDI Setup page will appear in the display. In this page you can select the
MIDI channel on which the AW4416 will transmit and receive, and specify
whether program changes and control changes will be transmitted and received.
3. Move the cursor to the RX (receive) button in the PROGRAM CHANGE
area, and press the [ENTER] key.
The button will change from “OFF” to “ON.” With this setting, program changes
can be received.
4. Move the cursor to the Rx CH knob in the MIDI CHANNEL area, and
rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the MIDI receive channel of the
AW4416.
Tip!
If you turn on the OMNI button in the PROGRAM CHANGE area, program changes
of all channels will be received.
— Operation Guide
235
Chapter15—MIDI
5. Press the [F3] key.
The PGM Asgn. page will appear, allowing you to assign AW4416 scene numbers
to each program number 1–128. The “PGM CHG.” column is the program
change number, and the “SCENE MEM.No./TITLE” column is the scene number
and title.
Tip!
If you move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button located in the right of the screen
and press the [ENTER] key, the scene number assignments will be initialized; scene
numbers 01–96 will be assigned to program numbers 1–96, and scene number 00
will be assigned to program change 100. (All other program change numbers will
be “-NO ASSIGN-.”)
6. Move the cursor to the PGM CHG. column, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial
to select a program change number (1–128).
7. Move the cursor to the right, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the
scene number (00–96) that will be assigned to the program change
number you selected in step 6.
236
— Operation Guide
Chapter15—MIDI
If you select “–NO ASSIGN–,” no scene number will be assigned to that program
change number. If you select a scene number which has not been stored in the
AW4416’s internal memory, the title area will indicate “[ No Data! ].”
If the same scene number is assigned to multiple program change numbers,
recalling the corresponding scene will cause only the lowest of the assigned program change numbers to be transmitted. When you recall a scene number to
which no program change is assigned, no program change will be transmitted.
8. Transmit a program change message from the external device.
The AW4416 will recall the scene corresponding to the program change that was
received.
Tip!
When you use the AW4416’s keys to recall a scene, you can cause a program
change corresponding to that scene to be transmitted. To do so, turn on the Tx button in the PROGRAM CHANGE area in the screen for step 2.
— Operation Guide
237
Chapter15—MIDI
Using MTC to synchronize the
AW4416 and a MIDI sequencer
MTC can be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector of the AW4416 to an
external device such as a MIDI sequencer or computer, causing the MIDI
sequencer (or computer-based sequencer program) to synchronize to the
AW4416 song.
1. Use a MIDI cable to connect the AW4416’s MTC OUT connector to the
MIDI IN connector of your MIDI sequencer.
MTC OUT connector
MIDI IN connector
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
MIDI sequencer
AW4416
MTC master
MTC slave
2. Press the [MIDI] key, and then press the [F2] key.
The following screen will appear in the display.
3. Move the cursor to the MASTER button in the MTC SYNC area, and
press the [ENTER] key.
With this setting, the AW4416 will function as the MTC master (the device that
transmits MTC).
4. Move the cursor to the MTC button in the SYNC OUT area, and press
the [ENTER] key.
With this setting, MTC will be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector when
the AW4416 is running.
5. If you need to set the MTC frame rate, press the [SONG] key and then
press the [F2] key.
238
— Operation Guide
Chapter15—MIDI
The following screen will appear in the display.
6. Move the cursor to the TIME CODE area, and turn on one of the 24/25/
30/30D (drop) buttons to select the frame rate.
By default, a frame rate of 30 is selected. The frame rate you select here will also
affect the time code that is displayed in the counter.
7. If you wish to display time code in the counter, move the cursor to the
TIME CODE button in the DISPLAY area, and press the [ENTER] key.
8. Set your MIDI sequencer so that it will follow MTC messages that it
receives, and put it in playback mode. At this time, make sure that the
frame rate setting of the sequencer matches the setting that you
selected in step 6.
With these settings, the MIDI sequencer will be the MTC slave (the device that
receives MTC).
9. Record or play back the AW4416 song.
When the AW4416 begins running, MTC will be transmitted from the MTC OUT
connector to the external MIDI sequencer, causing it to begin synchronized operation from the same location.
• It is possible to use the AW4416 as the MTC slave. However in order to ensure
that the recorder section operates with maximum stability, we recommend that
you use the AW4416 as the MTC master whenever possible.
• For the MTC time that is transmitted by the AW4416, you can specify an offset
value that will be applied to the internal absolute time (ABS time). For details
refer to the Song screen/Setting page in the Reference Guide.
— Operation Guide
239
Chapter15—MIDI
Using MIDI Clock to synchronize the
AW4416 and a MIDI sequencer
Here we will explain how MIDI Clock (and Song Position Pointer) messages can
be transmitted from the AW4416 instead of MTC, and used to synchronize an
external MIDI sequencer. Use this method if the MIDI sequencer or rhythm
machine you wish to synchronize with the AW4416 does not support MTC, or if
you wish to specify the locate positions in terms of measures/beats.
1. Use a MIDI cable to connect the AW4416’s MIDI OUT connector to the
MIDI IN connector of your MIDI sequencer.
MIDI OUT/THRU connector
MIDI IN connector
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
MIDI sequencer
AW4416
MIDI clock master
MIDI clock slave
2. Press the [MIDI] key, and then press the [F1] key.
The MIDI Setup screen will appear in the display.
3. Move the cursor to the OUT button of the MIDI OUT SEL. area, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The MIDI OUT SEL. buttons select whether the MIDI OUT/THRU connector will
function as a MIDI OUT connector (when the OUT button is on) or as a MIDI
THRU connector (when the THRU button is on). In this example we will turn on
the OUT button, in order to output the MIDI clock that is generated inside the
AW4416.
240
— Operation Guide
Chapter15—MIDI
4. Press the [F2] key.
The MIDI Sync page will appear in the display.
5. Move the cursor to the MIDI CLOCK button in the SYNC OUT area, and
press the [ENTER] key. Also make sure that the MASTER button in the
MTC SYNC area is on.
With these settings, MIDI Clock messages will be transmitted from the MIDI
OUT/THRU connector when the AW4416 is running.
6. Press the [SONG] key → [F2] key, and turn on the MEASURE button in
the DISPLAY area.
The counter display will be in measure/beat/tick (1/960th of a quarter note) units.
With this setting, you will be able to specify locate positions in measure/beat
units.
7. Press the [SONG] key, and then press the [F4] key.
The left side of the screen will show the beat map in which you can input time
signature data for the song, and the right side of the screen will show the tempo
map in which you can input tempo data. With the default settings for a song, a
time signature of 4/4 and a tempo of BPM=120.0 will be input at measure 1.
Note
In order for a MIDI sequencer to synchronize to the MIDI Clock messages send from
the AW4416, tempo settings and time signature settings must be made on the
AW4416. You can input this tempo data and time signature data in the Tempo Map
page described above.
— Operation Guide
241
Chapter15—MIDI
8. Move the cursor to the METER area of the beat map, and use the [DATA/
JOG] dial to specify the time signature for measure 1.
The time signature can be specified in a range of 1/2–8/8.
9. If you wish to change time signatures in the middle of the song, switch
the EDIT SELECT buttons at the bottom of the screen to METER. Then
move the cursor to the NEW button and press the [ENTER] key.
New time signature data will be added, allowing you to specify the new location
(measure) and time signature. (For details refer to the Song screen/Tempo Map
page in the Reference Guide.)
10. Move the cursor to the TEMPO column of the tempo map, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to specify the tempo for the first measure.
The tempo (BPM) can be set in 0.1 units over a range of 20.0–300.0.
11. If you wish to change tempo in the middle of the song, switch the EDIT
SELECT buttons at the bottom of the screen to TEMPO. Then move the
cursor to the NEW button and press the [ENTER] key.
New tempo data will be added, allowing you to specify the new location (measure/beat) and tempo. (For details refer to the Song screen/Tempo Map page in
the Reference Guide.)
12. Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will synchronize to an
external MIDI clock, and put it in playback-ready mode.
13. Record/play back the AW4416 song.
When you specify a location on the AW4416 in measure/beat units, the external
MIDI sequencer will also move to the same location. When the AW4416 begins
running, the MIDI sequencer will begin running in synchronization according to
the MIDI clock that is being transmitted.
Tip!
The internal metronome of the AW4416 will sound according to the tempo data
and time signature data you specify here.
242
— Operation Guide
Chapter15—MIDI
Using MMC to control the AW4416
MMC (MIDI Machine Control) is a group of MIDI messages used to control the
transport of an audio recorder etc. from an external MIDI device. The AW4416
supports MMC transmission and reception. This means that an external MIDI
device can control AW4416 transport operations, locate operations, selection
and disabling of recording tracks, or conversely that the AW4416 can control
transport and other operations on another MMC-compatible device.
In this section we will explain how MMC can be used to control various operations of the AW4416 from an external MIDI sequencer while MTC is being used
to synchronize the AW4416 and MIDI sequencer.
1. Connect the AW4416’s MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector
of the MIDI sequencer, and connect the AW4416’s MTC OUT connector
to the MIDI IN connector of the MIDI sequencer.
In this case, the MIDI sequencer will be the MMC master (the device transmitting
MTC) and MTC slave, and the AW4416 will be the MMC slave (the device receiving MMC) and MTC master.
MTC OUT
connector
MIDI IN
connector
MIDI IN
connector
MIDI OUT
connector
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION
MIDI sequencer
AW4416
MMC slave
MMC master
2. As described in “Using MTC to synchronize the AW4416 and a MIDI
sequencer” (→ P.238), make settings on both devices so that the
AW4416 and MIDI sequencer will run in synchronization.
3. Press the [MIDI] key, and then press the [F2] key.
— Operation Guide
243
Chapter15—MIDI
4. Move the cursor to the SLAVE button in the MMC area, and press the
[ENTER] key.
With this setting the AW4416 will function as an MMC slave device.
5. Move the cursor to the MMC DEV. knob, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to
set the MMC device ID.
The device ID is a number in the range of 1–127 that is used to distinguish the
device to be controlled when a single system contains multiple MMC-compatible
devices. By default, the AW4416 is set to device ID = 1.
6. On your MIDI sequencer, set the device ID of the MMC device to be
controlled to the same setting as in step 5.
Note
If necessary, you can specify the AW4416 recording track after step 6, and control
recording operations in step 7. For details on selecting the recording track and on
controlling record operations, refer to the manual for your MIDI sequencer.
7. Start playback on your MIDI sequencer.
When you start the MIDI sequencer, MMC commands will be transmitted to the
AW4416, and the AW4416 will begin running. At this time, MTC will be transmitted from the AW4416’s MTC OUT connector to the MIDI sequencer, and the
sequencer will synchronize to the AW4416.
244
— Operation Guide
16
Backing up and
restoring songs
This chapter explains how part or all of the song data on the internal hard
disk can be backed up to a SCSI device (such as a CD-RW drive or MO
drive), and how backed-up data can be restored to the internal hard disk.
This chapter also explains how to re-format the internal hard disk, and
how to erase CD-RW media.
Selecting the backup format
When using removable media such as MO as the backup destination, you must
first select the backup format.
1. Press the [UTILITY] key → [F4] key.
The UTILITY screen Prefer.3 page will appear in the display.
2. Move the cursor to the button in the REMOVABLE BACKUP area, and
select either “TYPE1” or “TYPE2” as the backup format.
Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the button display will alternate between
“TYPE1” and “TYPE2.” The difference between these formats is described below.
Tip!
When you backup on CD-RW media, TYPE 1 will be selected as the backup format
regardless of this setting. If the song being backed up will not fit on a single piece of
CD-RW media, the backup can extend across multiple volumes of media.
— Operation Guide
245
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
❍ TYPE1
This is the usual backup format, in which part or all of the songs are backed up
using the full capacity of the removable media. This format has the advantage that
even if the size of the song(s) being backed up exceeds the capacity of one volume of media, the backup can be performed using multiple volumes of media.
If this format is selected, the media will be formatted/erased automatically before
backup is performed.
❍ TYPE2
This backup format stores the specified song(s) or all songs as individual files on
removable media. This format has the advantage that new files can be stored on a
volume of media that already contains data backed up in the same format. However, it is not possible to backup data that extends across multiple volumes.
Before you can use this format to backup on newly purchased media, you must
first manually format the media.
Backing up a song
• If “TYPE1” is selected as the backup format, the media will automatically be
formatted before the backup is performed.
• If “TYPE2” is selected as the backup format, the media will not be formatted
automatically. If necessary, you must format the media manually.
• If you are backing up on removable media such as CD-RW or MO, insert the
CD-RW media or MO media into the drive before you begin this procedure.
1. Press the [FILE] key → [F1] key.
The FILE screen Backup page will appear in the display. The list in the upper part
of the display shows the songs that are currently saved on the internal hard disk.
The current song is highlighted in the list.
246
— Operation Guide
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
2. Move the cursor to the DESTINATION area in the lower right of the display, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the ID number of the backup
destination SCSI device (e.g., internal CD-RW drive or external hard disk
or MO drive).
It is also possible to backup on CD-R media using an internal or external CD-RW
drive. However, you should be aware that CD-R media on which a backup has
been created cannot be erased or added to.
3. Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the sound that you wish to backup.
4. Move the cursor to the button in the BACKUP SONG area and press the
[ENTER] key.
The button display will change from “DISABLE” to “ENABLE,” and the song will
be selected for backup. The “O” symbol at the left edge of the list will change to
“●” for songs that are selected for backup.
Tip!
• You can repeat steps 3 and 4 to select multiple songs for backup.
• If you wish to backup all songs, move the cursor to the ALL ENABLE button
located in the center of the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
• Conversely if you wish to exclude all songs from backup, move the cursor to
the ALL DISABLE button and press the [ENTER] key.
5. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower right of the display,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the backup operation.
— Operation Guide
247
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
6. To execute the backup, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
If “TYPE2” was selected as the backup format, the backup will begin immediately.
If “TYPE1” was selected as the backup format, the media will be formatted automatically (in the case of CD-RW media, all data will be erased). Then the backup
will begin. If the selected song(s) will not fit on a single volume of media, as message will ask you to insert the next volume. Eject the media and insert a new volume of media.
When backing up on a hard disk or MO disk, the disk will be formatted before
the backup is performed.
When backing up on a CD-RW disc, a popup window will ask you to confirm
that it is OK to erase the media. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key, and the media will first be erased and then the backup will be performed.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel the backup, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
• In the case of removable media such as MO, make sure that write protect is
defeated.
• If the backup extends across multiple volumes of media, be sure to note the
order of volumes on the label of the media.
• Once backup has begun, the operation cannot be cancelled.
Restoring a song
Here’s how data for the selected song(s) or all songs previously backed up to a
SCSI device (e.g., internal CD-RW drive, or external hard disk or MO drive) can
be restored to the AW4416’s internal hard disk.
• Before you begin, insert the disk (e.g., CD-RW or MO) containing the backedup data into the appropriate device. If the backup extended across multiple
volumes of media, make sure that the first volume of media is inserted.
• Once the restore operation has begun, it cannot be cancelled.
1. Press the [FILE] key → [F2] key.
The FILE screen Restore page will appear in the display.
2. Move the cursor to the SOURCE area in the lower left of the display, and
use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the ID number of the SCSI device on
which the backup data is saved.
3. Press the [ENTER] key.
The FILE RESTORE in the upper part of the display will show the song data that
was backed up to the selected SCSI device.
248
— Operation Guide
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
4. Move the cursor to the FILE RESTORE area in the upper part of the display, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song(s) that you wish to
restore, then press the [ENTER] key.
The button in the RESTORE SONG area will change from DISABLE to ENABLE,
indicating that the corresponding song has been selected for restore. The “O”
symbol at the left edge of the list will change to “●” for songs that are selected for
restore.
You can select multiple songs for restoring.
If you wish to restore all songs, move the cursor to the ALL ENABLE button in the
center of the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
Conversely, if you wish to exclude all songs from the restore operation, move the
cursor to the ALL DISABLE button and press the [ENTER] key.
5. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower right of the display,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the restore operation.
— Operation Guide
249
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
6. To execute the restore operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
To cancel the restore operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press
the [ENTER] key.
• Even when you restore from a SCSI device to the internal hard disk, the songs
that were previously recorded on the internal hard disk will remain unaffected.
Be aware that if songs of identical song names exist both in the backup and on
the internal hard disk at this time, the internal hard disk will end up containing
two identically-named songs.
• If the internal hard disk does not have sufficient free space to load the backup
data, the restore operation will not be executed.
Disk utilities
This section explains the disk utility functions, such as formatting the internal
hard disk or external SCSI device, and erasing CD-RW media.
Formatting the internal hard disk/external
SCSI device
Here’s how to format the internal hard disk/external SCSI device (hard disk, MO
disk drive).
When you execute the format operation, all songs saved on the device will be
lost forever. In particular, be very careful about formatting the internal hard disk.
Be sure to create a backup of important song data before you proceed.
1. Press the [FILE] key → [F3] key.
The FILE screen Disk Util. page will appear in the display.
250
— Operation Guide
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
2. Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the drive that you wish to format,
and press the [ENTER] key.
To format the internal hard disk, select “INT.IDE.” To format an external SCSI
device, select the SCSI ID of that device.
The rest of the procedure will differ depending on the type of drive you are formatting.
❒ Formatting the internal hard disk
3. Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the FORMAT area, and press
the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Format operation.
4. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear once again, asking you to confirm that you really
want to format the internal hard disk.
Tip!
If you decide to cancel the format operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button
and press the [ENTER] key.
5. Once again, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
Formatting will begin. When formatting of the internal disk is completed, an
empty song will be created automatically, and selected as the current song.
❒ Formatting an external hard disk
3. Select the SCSI ID of the external hard disk, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, allowing you to select the type of file system and
the formatting method.
— Operation Guide
251
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
4. Move the cursor to either the QUICK or the NORMAL button, and press
the [ENTER] key.
The formatting method will depend on the button you select.
❍ QUICK (quick format)
Use this when you wish to quickly erase data from a previously-formatted hard
disk.
❍ NORMAL (normal format)
Use this when formatting a newly purchased hard disk. Depending on the capacity of the hard disk, this may require several minutes or several-ten minutes.
After selecting one or the other button, press the [ENTER] key, and a popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Format operation.
5. Move the cursor to the TYPE area, and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select one of the following two types of file system that will be created
during the formatting operation.
• ORIGINAL ...................This is the native file system of the AW4416. Select
this file system if you have selected TYPE2 as the
backup format.
• FAT 16 ..........................This is the file system used on PC-type computers
(e.g., Windows 95 or Windows 98 machines). Select
this file system if you wish to exchange files with a
PC.
The AW4416 does not support the “FAT32” file system used on Windows 95
OSR2 and subsequent operating systems.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Format operation.
6. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Formatting will be performed.
252
— Operation Guide
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
❒ Formatting removable media such as an MO drive
A FORMAT window will appear, allowing you to select the type of file system
and the formatting method.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE area, and rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to
select one of the following two types of file system that will be created
during the formatting operation.
• ORIGINAL ...................This is the native file system of the AW4416. Select
this file system if you have selected TYPE2 as the
backup format.
• FAT 16 ..........................This is the file system used on PC-type computers
(e.g., Windows 95 or Windows 98 machines). Select
this file system if you wish to exchange files with a
PC.
4. Move the cursor to either the QUICK or the NORMAL button, and press
the [ENTER] key.
The formatting method will depend on the button you select.
❍ QUICK (quick format)
Use this when you wish to quickly erase data from a previously-formatted MO
disk.
❍ NORMAL (normal format)
Use this when formatting a newly purchased MO disk. Depending on the capacity of the MO disk, this may require several minutes or several-ten minutes.
After selecting one or the other button, press the [ENTER] key, and a popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Format operation.
5. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
Formatting will begin.
— Operation Guide
253
Chapter16—Backing up and restoring songs
Erasing CD-RW media
Here’s how to erase CD-RW media inserted in the CD-RW drive.
1. Press the [FILE] key → [F3] key.
The FILE screen Disk Util. page will appear in the display.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI ID number of the CD-RW
drive, and press the [ENTER] key.
3. Use the two buttons (PERFECTLY/SIMPLY buttons) in the CD-RW MEDIA
ERASE area to select the method by which the CD-RW media will be
erased.
The CD-RW media can be erased in one of the following two ways.
• PERFECTLY ...................All data written on the CD-RW media will be erased.
This will take significantly longer than SIMPLE, but
can be selected when you want to be sure that the
data is completely erased.
• SIMPLY .........................Only the table of contents (TOC) of the data written
on the CD-RW will be erased. This method has the
advantage of being fast.
Move the cursor to one of these methods and press the [ENTER] key. A popup
window will ask you to confirm the erasure.
4. To execute the Erase operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
When you execute the Erase operation, all data that was saved on the CD-RW
media will be lost forever. Please use caution.
254
— Operation Guide
17
Mastering
This chapter explains the “mastering function” which allows you to use the
internal CD-RW drive (option) of the AW4416 to create an audio CD.
About mastering
By installing a CD-RW drive in the AW4416 (or connecting an external CD-RW
drive to the SCSI connector), you can write the audio data of the stereo track
(included in each song) onto CD-R/RW media in CD-DA format. This function is
called “mastering.” The CD-R/RW media to which the data is written can be
played back on the internal CD-RW drive or on conventional CD players in the
same way as an audio CD.
Some CD players and CD-ROM drives which do not support CD-R/RW may be
unable to play back audio data that was written on CD-R/RW media.
Stereo tracks that can be mastered
To master a song, you will select the desired stereo track from the stereo track
included in each song on the internal hard disk, and write it to a track on the CDR/RW media. However, only stereo tracks (more than four seconds) from songs
recorded as 16 bit/24 bit and a 44.1 kHz sampling frequency can be mastered.
• Mastering cannot be performed from the stereo track of a song whose sampling frequency is 48 kHz.
• When mastering is performed from a 24 bit/44.1 kHz stereo track, the lower
8 bits will be discarded when the data is written, converting it into 16 bit/
44.1 kHz format.
— Operation Guide
255
Chapter17—Mastering
CD-R and CD-RW
CD-RW drives support two types of media: “CD-R” and “CD-RW.” These two
types of media differ in the following ways.
❍ CD-R
CD-R media can only be recorded or added to. Previously-recorded data cannot
be erased and rewritten.
CD-R media to which audio data has been written by the AW4416’s mastering
function can be played back on a CD-RW drive or on most CD players if the
media has been “finalized.” Additional audio data can be recorded on CD-R
media only if the disc has not yet been finalized.
❍ CD-RW
CD-RW media allows previously-recorded data to be entirely erased and rewritten. (CD-RW does not allow data to be added as on a CD-R.) CD-RW media to
which audio data has been written by the AW4416’s mastering function can be
played back on a CD-RW drive or on some CD players. However caution is necessary, since many CD players do not support CD-RW at the present time.
The following table shows compatibility between CD-R/CD-RW media on which
audio data has been recorded, and CD-RW drives and CD players.
Recording/Playback
CD-RW drives
CD players
●
No silence between
tracks
O
No silence between
tracks
Finalized
●
Two seconds of silence
between tracks
O
Two seconds of silence
between tracks
Not finalized
×
(data can be added)
×
●
No silence between
tracks
q
No silence between
tracks
Disc At Once
(finalized automatically)
CD-R
Track At
Once
Disc At Once
(finalized
automatically)
CD-RW
Track At Once
● : playable
O : playable on most devices
q : playable on some devices
× : not playable
256
— Operation Guide
CD-RW media does not support Track At Once
Chapter17—Mastering
Track At Once and Disc At Once
Data can be written to CD-R/RW media in one of the following two ways.
❍ Track At Once
In this method, data is written in units of tracks (individual regions of audio data).
This method can be used only for CD-R media.
When the Track At Once method is used to write data to a CD-R, approximately
two seconds of silence will be created between tracks each time a track is written. Additional audio data can be recorded later on CD-R media that was written
using this method.
• In order for CD-R media written using Track At Once to be played on a CD-RW
drive or on a conventional CD player, you must perform the Finalize operation
to write track location data etc. on the disc after all tracks have been written.
• No further recording is possible on CD-R media that has been finalized.
❍ Disc At Once
This method writes the data for all tracks in one operation, and can be used for
either CD-R or CD-RW media. Unlike the Track At Once method, the operation
will not stop until all data has been written, meaning that there will be no silent
sections between tracks.
• CD-R/CD-RW media written using Disc At Once will automatically be finalized, and can therefore be played immediately on a CD player.
• No further data can be recorded on media written using Disc At Once. (However in the case of CD-RW media, you can erase all of the audio data and then
rewrite.)
— Operation Guide
257
Chapter17—Mastering
Preparations for mastering
Here we will explain the preparations that you will need to make before writing
audio data to CD-R/CD-RW media.
❒ Mastering mode settings
The AW4416 has a “writing test” function that checks before mastering to see
whether errors will occur during data transmission. By default, the AW4416 will
not perform this test before mastering, but you may perform the test if desired, or
execute only the test by itself. Here’s how to make these settings.
1. Press the [UTILITY] key → [F4] key.
The UTILITY screen Prefer.3 page will appear.
2. To perform the writing test, turn the TEST button on and the WRITE button on in the MASTERING MODE area.
3. To execute only the writing test, turn the TEST button on and the WRITE
button off in the MASTERING MODE area.
• It is not possible to turn off both the TEST and WRITE buttons.
• When writing for the first time, we recommend that you leave the TEST button
on.
258
— Operation Guide
Chapter17—Mastering
Writing the master
Here’s how to use the mastering function to write the stereo track data to CD-R/
RW media.
1. Press the [MASTERING] key.
The MASTERING screen will appear in the display.
2. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [F2] key (CD UNLOAD).
The tray of the CD-RW drive will open.
3. Place a CD-R/RW disc on the tray. Then hold down [SHIFT] and press the
[F1] key (CD LOAD).
The tray will close.
4. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI ID number of the AW4416’s
internal CD-RW drive, and press the [ENTER] key.
In the MASTERING screen, you can access all stereo tracks (44.1 kHz sampling
frequency) saved on the internal hard disk. Thus, it is not necessary that the stereo track be part of the current song.
— Operation Guide
259
Chapter17—Mastering
5. Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button if you wish to master
using Track At Once, or to the DISC AT ONCE button if you wish to master using Disc At Once. Then press the [ENTER] key.
If you are using CD-RW media, only DISC AT ONCE can be used. The following
screen is an example of when you have inserted CD-R media in the tray, moved
the cursor to TRACK AT ONCE, and pressed the [ENTER] key.
6. Move the cursor to the NEW button at the bottom of the display, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The list in the right of the display will show information (the name of the song
containing the stereo track, the size of the stereo track, and the copy protect setting) for the stereo track that will be written to CD audio track 1.
260
— Operation Guide
Chapter17—Mastering
7. Move the cursor to the stereo track data area of the list, and use the
[DATA/JOG] dial to select the stereo track that you wish to write to track
1 of the CD.
Stereo tracks from 48 kHz songs cannot be selected in this list. Also in some
cases, it may not be possible to select stereo tracks from songs for which Optimize has not been executed. To optimize a song, refer to page 182.
8. If you wish to allow digital copying of the track you selected in step 7,
move the cursor to the COPYRIGHT button at the bottom of the screen,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The COPYRIGHT button specifies whether copy prohibit data will be written into
the subcode channel of the CD. When the button is displayed as PROHIBIT, a
symbol will be displayed in the COPY column of the corresponding track, and
digital copying will be prohibited for that track. If you switch the COPYRIGHT
button to PERMIT, digital copying will be allowed for that track.
9. Repeat steps 5–7 to select the stereo tracks that will be written into track
numbers 2 and following of the CD.
Tip!
By using the DEL button at the bottom of the display, you can remove the currently
selected stereo track from the list. By using the INS button, you can insert data for a
new audio track into the track number that follows the currently selected track.
— Operation Guide
261
Chapter17—Mastering
10. As necessary, use the WRITE SPEED buttons located in the lower left of
the display to select the writing speed.
The x1/x2/x4/x6 buttons correspond to single-speed/double-speed/quad-speed/
6x speed writing. Normally you should select the fastest speed that your CD-RW
drive supports.
11. When you have finished selecting all of the stereo tracks that will be
written to the CD, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower
right of the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the operation.
12. To execute the writing operation, move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key.
If you decide to cancel the disc writing operation, move the cursor to CANCEL
and press the [ENTER] key.
After all data has been written, the media will be ejected automatically.
Tip!
• If Writing Test is turned on, the writing test will be executed before the actual
writing begins. If a problem occurs during the test, a message will appear.
• If you write using Disc At Once, the media can be played in a CD player as
soon as it is ejected.
• If you write to CD-R media using Track At Once, a popup window will ask you
whether you wish to finalize the disc.
13. If you wish to execute the Finalize operation, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key. The CD-RW tray will close automatically, and the disc will be finalized.
If you do not wish to finalize, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press
the [ENTER] key. In this case, additional data can be recorded later on the ejected
CD-R media.
262
— Operation Guide
Chapter17—Mastering
Finalizing
As long as you have not executed the Finalize operation, other stereo track data
can be added to CD-R media that was recorded using Track At Once. However,
media that has not yet been finalized cannot be played back by a CD-RW drive
or a conventional CD player. In order to use a CD player to play CD-R media on
which you have written data, use the following procedure to execute the Finalize
operation.
1. Press the [MASTERING] key.
2. Place the CD-R media that you wish to finalize on the CD-RW drive tray.
3. Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The FINALIZE button will appear at the left of the TRACK AT ONCE button. The
list in the right side of the display will show the tracks that have been written on
the CD-R media.
— Operation Guide
263
Chapter17—Mastering
4. Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button and press the [ENTER] key.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Finalize command.
5. To execute the Finalize command, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
To cancel without executing, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press
the [ENTER] key.
Playing CD-R/RW media (the CD Play
function)
By using the AW4416’s CD Play function, CD-R/RW media that contains audio
data can be played back from the internal CD-RW drive (or from an external CDRW drive connected to the SCSI connector).
1. Press the [CD PLAY] key.
The CD PLAY screen will appear in the display.
2. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI ID of the CD-RW drive, and
press the [ENTER] key.
3. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [F2] key (CD UNLOAD).
The tray of the CD-RW drive will open.
4. Place the CD-R/RW media on which data was written into the drive.
Then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [F1] key (CD LOAD).
264
— Operation Guide
Chapter17—Mastering
5. Move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The CD PLAY MODE button will change from OFF to ON, and track information
for the CD-R/RW media in the drive will be displayed.
1
2
1 Currently selected track number (TRACK column) and elapsed time (TIME
column).
B Track numbers on the disc (TRACK column) and their track times (TIME column).
• CD-R media that has not been finalized cannot be played back.
• The counter in the level meters/counter section will not function while you are
using the CD Play function.
6. Use the Locate section [
to play.
]/[
] keys to select the track that you wish
7. To begin playback, press the Transport section [PLAY] key.
The audio output of the CD-RW drive will be sent directly to the stereo bus. Use
the STEREO fader to adjust the volume.
8. To stop playback, press the [STOP] key.
Tip!
While playback is stopped, you can press and hold the [REW]/[FF] keys to rewind or
fast-forward. (However, there will be no sound.)
9. To exit the CD PLAY function, move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE
button and press the [ENTER] key.
• While the CD Play function is being used, all keys except for [
]/[
[PLAY], [STOP], [REW]/[FF], and [ENTER] will have no effect.
• If you wish to perform other operations, turn off the CD Play function.
],
— Operation Guide
265
Index
A
A/B point 118
Deleting 126
A-B repeat 118
Active terminator 11
Additional function 59
ADP25H 2
Analog input/output section 31
Audio tracks 147
Auto Punch In point 130
Auto Punch Out Point 130
Auto punch-in/out 130
Recording 132
Rehearsing 131
AUTOMATION section 41
Automix 213
Creating a new automix 214
Editing off-line 225
Editing the fader 223
first section 216
Overwriting events 219
Playing back 218
punch-in/out 221
Recalling 230
Storing 228
AUX buses 1–8 28
AW4416
Features 19
Signal flow 22
user interface 51
B
Backed-up 245
Backup format 245
Buses 1–8 28
Button 53, 57
C
CD Play function 264
CD-R 256
CD-R/RW
Playing 264
CD-RW 256
Erasing media 254
CD-RW drive 5, 21
Installation procedure 6
Manual eject 10
Removing the transport
protection pad 9
SCSI ID 5
Clicking 52
Connections 67
Counter 54, 54
Cue 110
Current song 75, 177
Cursor 52
CURSOR/JOG & SHUTTLE
section 42
D
Digital cascade connections 27
Disc At Once 257
Disk utilities 250
Display 38, 51
Contrast 39
Display section 38
Dragging 53
Dynamics processor 92
E
Effect type library 167
End point 117
EQ 91
External SCSI device 10
Connection procedure 11
Formatting 250
F
Fader 37, 53
fader 58
Fader groups 101
Fader mode 64
FADER MODE section 34
Finalizing 263
Foot switch 128
Formatting 250
Formatting removable media
253
Front panel 50
Fs 76
Function key 56
H
Headphone output 30
I
I/O cards 13
Installation procedure 14
IBM/PC series 233
Importing (mixer data) 183
Importing mixer data 183
In point 120
In/Out point
Deleting 126
Included items 1
Input channels 1–24 24
Input patch 23
Inputting text 60
Internal clock 16
Internal effects 29, 99, 165
AUX send/return 166
Inserting 171
library 167
Patching 166, 171
post-fader 169
pre-fader 169
return level 170
send level 170
Internal hard disk 2
Access indicator 39
Formatting 250
Installation 3
K
Knob 53, 58
L
LAST SOLO 97
Level meter/counter section 39
— Operation Guide
267
Index
Level meters 54
Level meters/counter 40
Locate point
Adjusting the location 123
Deleting 125, 126
Locate section 43
Locating 114
S
Oscillator 27
Out point 120
Output patch 29
Overdubbing 87
Sampling frequency 76
Sampling pad 185
Assigning a region 187
Assigning to channels 186
Copying a performance 198
Erasing a performance 201
Erasing a sample 194
Erasing name 194
Naming 193
Recording your performance
196
SAMPLING PAD section 21, 45
Scene 203
Changing the order 209
name 207
Parameters included in a scene
203
Protecting 208
Recalling 206, 212
Saving 105
scene numbers 203
Storing 204, 211
Switching scenes from an
external device 235
SCENE MEMORY section 41
SCSI errors 12
Selecting channels 63
Set the input level 78, 87
Shut-down 17
Shuttle function 110
Simultaneously playable tracks
147
Simultaneously recordable tracks
147
Solo 96
Song 175
Backing up 246
comment 179
Copying 181
Creating songs 75
Deleting 180
Loading 178
name 179
Optimizing 182
Restoring 248
Saving 106, 177
Start point 117
Stereo output channel 27
Stereo track 102, 148
Synchronize a MIDI sequencer
238, 240
P
M
M button 52
Macintosh series 233
Make monitor settings 83, 90
Manual punch-in/out 128
recording 129
Marker 121
Deleting 126
Mastering 255
Stereo tracks that can be
mastered 255
Mastering mode 258
MIDI 231
MIDI Clock 240
MIDI connectors 232
MIX SOLO 97
Mixdown 95
MIXDOWN SOLO 97
MIXER section 19, 33
MIXING LAYER section 35
Mixing layers 35
MMC 243
Monitor channels 1–16 26
Monitor output 30
Mouse 52
MTC 54, 238
MTC OUT connector 232
Mute groups 101
MY4-AD 13
MY4-DA 13
MY8-AD 13
MY8-AE 13
MY8-AT 13
MY8-TD 13
N
Nudge function 110
nudge time 112
play mode 112
Numerical box 53, 58
268
O
Page 56
Pair 80
PART menu 162
Parts 152
Patch library 138
Storing 138
Patch program
Recalling 139
Patching 133
input channels 133
insert I/O point 140
outputs 136
recorder inputs 135
Pointer 52
PORT SELECT parameter 234
Post-roll time 130
Pre-roll time 130
Program changes 235
Punch-in/out 127
Q
Quantization 76
Quick Rec function 143
R
Rear panel 46
Recbit 76
Recorder input patching 26
RECORDER section 20, 40
RECORDING SOLO 97
Recording the first tracks 78
Region 152
Naming 155
REGION menu 163
Return channels 1/2 25
Review 110
Rollback function 113
— Operation Guide
Index
T
Tab 53
Terminator 11
Text input box 61
Text palette 61
TO HOST connector 232
Top panel 31
Track 152
Editing 152
editing 156
Editing command 161
mix balance 95
Pairing 151
record-ready mode 82, 89
stereo track 102
track structure 147
Track At Once 257
TRACK menu 161
Transport key 109
Transport section 44
Trimming a sample 190
Turning the power off 17
Turning the power on 15
U
UNIT section 32
V
Virtual tracks 148
Editing 152
editing 159
Naming 153
Switching virtual tracks 149
W
Word clock 54, 68
WORK NAVIGATE section 32
Z
zero relative time 115
— Operation Guide
269
YAMAHA CORPORATION
V618350 R1 1 IP 284
00 09 7000 AP Printed in Japan
Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
P.O. Box 3, Hamamatsu, 430-8651, Japan